Home

2012 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

1. 004 587 W Dealer Service 000005 587 Bl Maintenance Procedures 588 OPO CME OU Lou ones on pees ees Bes Poir on 589 DEn CME UL PEG s apud x v 9 902 124 JUR RR 4 022 O Engme Air leaner Filter i 2 oew 2x3 xar ema 592 O Mamtenance Free Battery isses 593 D Air Conditioner Maintenance A Body DubDECOBOIE 2 22 riurPS SR ERES o Windshield Wiper Blades 596 B Adding Washer Fluid 0 598 HExhaust5ystel 12 493 2 442 X 959 343 999 582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx EL CoDlIBS GYEN 2349443945 1E Pea TS 602 ELDIQEG D SUSHI 44 242 doe ees qua ch re pp oe HR 607 O Front Rear Axle Fluid 609 Diitadsier dee save shee een P WR eh eye ds 610 O Automatic Transmission xascka 4 cbe d des s 611 D Appearance Care And Protection From CODNIDSIOIS Gute edm beeen EARS TI SPEM EIE 614 dn PvE 620 o Totally Integrated Power Module 620 W Vehicle Storage 00 626 W Replacement Bulbs 626 W Bulb Replacement 0 627 3 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID IF PGUIDDCE dace omit epe m rt ner EIS PS 627 3 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 628 ETO VUE OIC Nal Ane ate peal oe eo oo oe ty 628 ETDTONnPPOS Lamps 2232 29 x5 29 xd hee lt q ieii 629 O Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup In 4 630 O Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 631 o Center High Moun
2. 0 0 519 RONIOCA Tr 596 Reminder Seat Belt Lens 66 Remote Control Slats SySEOIL ass 2o ced bee AG RWS GR SES 29 Remote Keyless Entry RKE is eua ote RS 24 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 398 Remote Starling 5ySLeIll use 4 eder der acp eor sa 29 Replacement BUDS 424 58 4 545tan4eeugseess 626 Replacement Keys c425 4464 3634 n8 44 priii hi 19 Replacement PariS gion er a eds feeder des es 587 Keplacement Tires sra deae Redon hee ante A 505 Reporting Safety Defects 4 s a d e edie a ead s 658 Restraints Child uuu uuu Ro eeeaueea das 83 Resirants Occupant as cata eee tags oe we ue ES 50 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 2 5 BollOver Waris vasos ves deep Uds pr dre dus D Rotation Tires 2c 4 Grad dk 9 xod ose Sur HOES 508 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 98 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 100 Safety Defects Reporting 204454 9 34 2454s 658 Safety Information Ie espeia saadaa ieas 487 ey UPS 224 peek oe r eren E RR RUE 96 Salety Exha st GaS oa irks be eiaa 49 97 Satellite Radio Antenna 442565340455 deep 393 Schedule Maintenance 678 INDEX M Scat Belt BOHHBOIGP 4426462442 50a5s5e54 5 ERS 66 Seat DONS 45446664 65 0 03o6 45 Sea Roo AS 53 98 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 59 And Pregnant Women 5 ia dx d 67 Child Restraint 9552 939 3 9x 355 42 29 83 91 EXQCNOCl M P 67 PRONG Deel 233930080 oa eee es a
3. Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 544 STARTING AND OPERATING ee An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 Kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision Towing Requirements Tra
4. Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unauthor ized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks power liftgate and flipper glass are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 audio and visual signals the horn will sound the head lights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 min utes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to de
5. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621 Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse RD em Pink Pink Relay Contact Natural Module x e Natural Node J06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Main Ignition Off Green Pump Stability Draw IOD Control System Trailer Tow J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Lamps Park Lamps Pink Valve Stability Front Cabin Fan Control System Blower Jos 40 Amp Power Seat Green J09 30 Amp E Brake Pink 622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 20 Amp Powertrain Control M2 20 Amp _ Electronic Limit Blue Module Powertrain Yellow Slip Differential Control Module Air Suspension Transmission Range M3 20 Amp Liftgate Headrest 60 Amp Radiator Fan Motor Yellow Yellow HI Radiator Fan M5 25 Amp 115V AC Power Motor Low Natural Inverter Yellow 20 Amp aa Front Rear Washer M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Blue Control Yellow Switchable 25 Amp NEN Sunroof Module M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Natural Yellow amp Steering Wheel m 15 Amp Stop Lamps M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Blue Yellow J20 30 Amp Pink MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M10 15 Amp Video Universal M15 20 Amp _ Power Seat Blue Garage Door Yellow Module s Opener Adaptive Cruise Control Audio Telematics Daytime Running Lights Relay Air Suspen sion Module E SN yon di Md Instrument
6. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate 3 Once lower trim is loose close the liftgate Open the flipper glass Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker 073310731 Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps Continue removing the trim 10 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter clockwise Oo CO N DB O fe Disconnect the two trim panel lights 11 Remove replace bulb s 12 Reinstall the socket s 13 Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear License Lamp The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the license lamp lens 2 Pull bulb from socket 3 Replace bulb 4 Reinstall lens 073310730 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 93 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 6 Liters Cooling System S U S Metric 3 6L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile F
7. p Active Head Restraint Normal Position Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re WARNING Continued straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or Head Restraints Rear Seats death The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust Continued able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised After returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard headrests are not removable tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loos
8. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Select Mode AM DISC WEATHER Preset 40 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate FM AUX 135 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES WEATHER Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE SAT Ves DISC LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen Ba The Weather Channel TV Ws AUX1 Be Weather Channel HDD TEXTE Ed Mother Nature DVD Video Menu gm Display Setting Fee My Files DVD Setup F Screen gt Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp E 5 bes 00 00 Enter to Select Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen System Setup Play Pause View NOTE Lew Picture e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown Rear VES AM View on the left side of the screen Map Audio Control avum e Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown 010107721 on the right side of the screen Rear VES Soft key 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Touch the 1 or 2 soft key based on the channel you want to change and then the DISC soft key in the MEDIA column To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the screen NOTE To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is not available in all states provinces and the vehicle must be stopped
9. to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel T itch to the F FM or Radio FM I dde eae rnp dy ordinum Pg List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l M Radio t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station enu Radio to switch to the radio menu s 44 p h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Menu Radio t itch to the radi j ERA Ato oath tO RHODE e To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next
10. 4 m uh 7 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be pe
11. NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 16 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels 4 LOW For further information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 17 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 18 Fuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol
12. decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the changes cooling system pressure cap are a safety precau tion Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal 606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals and children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assista
13. e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 021809604 Power Door Lock Switch If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking th
14. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603 Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly may result in engine damage and may decrease dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Refer to the Maint hedule for th erer to tne aintenance Schedule for the proper system in an emergency it should be replaced with maintenance intervals the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Selection Of Coolant possible Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they information may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator 604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued When adding engine coolant antifreeze e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Tar manufacturer recommends ene oe Antifreeze Co
15. 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031563345 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sen
16. Bmpr phone Ao die dale Fahey Cet heed Salem Lisia Fhongs All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Voice Commands Primar language send 0 o 000000 0 0 list names list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n Uconnect Tutorial try again other mobile DS set up phone settings or phone phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM r
17. INETROMENT PANEL SEAT BEL SLIDING DOOR TRUN DECK Al CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION VARNING TOW HAUL D 45CcSMG DEFSDST LLIA SUTTON CY i A 4 w e d No amp 29 A d LOWET ANCHORS how P uc POWER WwWwDeOHImS WER SOE ARBAG AJREAC Be fed DOD EMEIGENCY LENTER AND TETHER F R PDDMAERTI AZASIT Four ww STEERING FLD AW WADARS RELEASE HANDLE ECWLDREM LATCH SUTTON DRWE LOW SAS X AIC C G lt x nnne t2 dai lt zi an PUSH OFF MALFUSICTION TRANS ENGMECOQLANT BHPFLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTWILE COME TLE HORN SEE CWhESTE Am ELECTRONIC WOECATOR LIGHT tL TEMP TEMPERATURE WESTRAMITSYSTEM MAARAG DFF TD DOWN Tor us MANUAL GO CONDITIONER M Ee b 1 053331 7 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body behind the right front seat Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN This number also appears on the Automobile
18. If the liftgate flipper glass is open the rear window wiper washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper stops at that park position When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper will resume wiper washer functionality after five seconds Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderail
19. Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the Ne button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the S button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pai
20. Press And Release 035410217 Three Press Switch 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Cargo Storage Bins Two additional storage bins are located under the load There are four removable storage bins located in the rear floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor cargo area There are two storage bins located on either and attach the tether hook attached to the bottom of the side of the cargo area load floor to the liftgate opening seine e 035409794 Rear Storage Bins Tether Strap Lower Storage Bins UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in WARNING place In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle
21. 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too c
22. Cargo Tie Down Hooks The cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving 035407397 Rear Cargo Cover UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or acci dent a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting Cargo Tie Down Hooks in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued REAR WINDOW FEATURES e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits Rear Window Wiper Washer described on the label attached to the left door or The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch left door center pillar located on the control lever The control lever is located Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put on the left side of the steering column heavier objects as
23. disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftg
24. from radio mode e Press and hold the Sve button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the EVR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to m
25. 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen 2 While looking at the video screen either press Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen Se 2 EXP WEATHER 035 10 AM DISC FM BEES ud SAT Ves DISC DIRECT TUNE HE The Weather Channel A other Nature Ves AUX2 Bn Weather Channel Ves AUX 00 00 Enter to Select S Select FM Mode On The VES Screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 3 To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1 touch the 2 soft key and 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate choose an audio source To exit touch the back arrow 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES soft key at the top left of the left screen y play y P Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen Rear VES Controls by Favorites M Ves j am Display x DVD Video Menu M Setting 00 12 ME HDD Hie FER My Files DVD Setup Ramp Screen TRK 1 of 109 FM DISC AUX1 Saver g Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp SAT AUX AUX2 CS view SCAN INFO TV System Setup Play Pause facts ge
26. 14 319 fo e peewee Gea bey eae ee ees eae 14 Lap Shoulder DENS 2 xsara duds fae avaeeye as 53 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CR os oa 6 o eee eae ek au eae dae aes ou 87 88 nic P 100 Lead Free Gasoline less 518 Leaks Fl id 224239 rU Redes 4 ob 100 Life of Tires amp 4 e525 ae 4 eee eae eee ee es 504 lec 44 3243 bees eee EA eee a 45 Inifteate Clipper 6358 2 2 cee ct RR teen gees 46 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 278 LiDE BUIBS 2224 91424 02e SOROR SO SORS 100 PIGS T ee pec sess eu 100 182 ADAE A ea es 76 81 98 289 AU LOE ueae Geos er ese n 296 Automatic Headlights 183 Back UO hs eas atte tot facies Gees age 630 Brake Assist Warning essct oae 486 Brake Warning 5 6ee eeu 284 Nee SORA oes 294 BUIb Replacement aod ost ede Pop uh aes 627 0 CE 274 Center Mounted Stop 12424 icta 640454 632 Davtune RUNNIDE uec eacus ate eo gia Rohre 185 Dimmer Switch Headlight 182 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 486 ETIO 232 voca 9 3 9 2X4 EA LEES EROR S EON 100 HOR PP m 291 629 2445 5 5h Gee ned Shek eee eee ee 620 Hazard Warning Flasher 2 2 es 558 CAMS 6 4 9544 Pp 627 628 Headlights On With Wipers 183 Mien Deam IndiedlOf a6 ss k ks c itoan 291 Hill Descent Control Indicator 291 DUG e EHID sadga oe eee ere were 4 is 23 Low Fuel 222 223 ERR 309 Malfunction Indicato
27. 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on the driver s side should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will result in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the then pull the key out with your other hand OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e
28. 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the righ
29. 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for whichever comes first damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic tra
30. AM FM modes to Disc modes eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Pre
31. Ability to Disk Up Down and program all listed CD controls Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 The VES can even control radio modes or video modes Information Mode Display while the radio is turned off The VES can access the radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode Information Mode Video Screen Display Channel 1 Mode Channel 1 Shared Status Channel 1 Audio Only Mute Channel 2 Mode Q N e 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Channel 2 Shared Status 5 6 Channel 2 Audio Only Mute 7 Channel 1 ENTER Button Action 8 Channel 2 ENTER Button Action 9 Clock 10 Video Lock 11 Not Available Error 12 Disc Changer Status Numeric Keypad Menu EH Input File 2 SAT m WEATHER Preset 10 WEATHER HJ The Weather Channel Bs Weather Channel Pa Mother Nature e 3 Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE pressing the remote control s ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu This ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency satellite channel or track number To enter the desired digit 1 Press the remote control s navigation buttons A V gt 4 to navigate to the desired digit 2 When the digit is highlighted press the remote con
32. Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Advanced Front Air Bag Features
33. DIO DIS MUU sierra s prae x oe oe Rd 100 291 628 630 SmartBeams ok uta bees d emo oe pe ee Pos e s 184 Snow Chains Tire Chains 507 Snow FIOW 22 6 s 4 es boob oe MbE hse S eRe EO 547 SHOW eS wa baws eee dane oa ee ee eee 4 508 SDSIO DH sorrire sand PER NUR RUP dS 501 502 560 Specifications Fuel Gasoline sss 518 Ol eee oe be eee oe eee ees oe ee 590 Speed Control Cruise Control 202 205 Jer selon s scmaninects cess et Po eaes ess 296 Sgt RET rr 29 421 Automatic Transmission 421 Cold Weather vs lt 5646 44i665 4444 425 427 Engine Block Heater ess gura as obs et 427 Ene Fails to DB i143 ams ER RS ys 425 Remote 224 2952 4B d 3T8S5 EP MEAE 29 Daran and ODORE erreser 2 9 oh age ees 421 Starine Probcedufes a2 qe 09i PER RR RUR 421 Steering EON usse kth eee ENE eee eee 468 470 Ti Colin uu 2 bx ue o 5 248 Seb ehh 198 199 Wheel Heated eee 200 Wheel Gb 2521992290922 PES RENS 198 199 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 398 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System CONTOS scs se Gane concep eed Mod Bree ees 398 nc f p C T 626 Storage Vehicle sso 98 ans e E 64 RAS SEO 412 626 Storing Your Vehicle sssr v nues eee a oo E aos 626 DUN ROOF o 22 E REGE et 45 3X ebai ii 255 258 DUI Visor EX ENSION sesos 42458 94044 a a ea 113 Sunglasses Storag esc oe eave sssaaa miii 245 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 67 SUSPENS
34. Do not use a garage door opener without The transmitter has been tested and it complies with these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for expressly approved by the party responsible for com safety information or Beetles l pliance could void the user s authority to operate the Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan device gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas The term IC before the certification registration num can cause serious injury or death ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 1 This device may not cause harmful interference UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 ee e WARNING O The power sunroof switch is located between the sun WARNING visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof
35. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR
36. E S 8 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 640 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 8 000 miles 13 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 16 000 miles 26 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 641 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Mont
37. Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with eno
38. Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result E 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Expre
39. Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the P
40. Se RR s P Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 2s acp soos ob ecu ax 100 H Advanced Front Air Bag Features 70 O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 74 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON RUN position NOTE With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion a Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF
41. a bristle brush stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Cle
42. and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions Remote Control VCR 05254 Remote Control Controls And Indicators 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed press the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 2 Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pressed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily 3 Light Turns the remote control backlighting on or off The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five seconds 4 Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 right side of the screen When the selector switch is in the Channel 2 position the remote controls the function ality of headphone Channel 2 left side of the screen 5 P In radio modes press to seek the next
43. begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF STARTING AND OPERATING 487 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 488 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standar
44. domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension
45. e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre i gem P Rote bps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 uec00 10 56 15 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3
46. eeceesetesereeredees eee sees 314 FOC System CAUHON sasea 0s deo oe es 529 Fuel Flexible iesse 2 hes ee oe See oa Be 523 ln J A PAT 620 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 246 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 2cenigsaa4 927 930 585 Gasoline Fuel 44 444 5 440804 E RR OA 518 ONSEIVING a 24 io 8 RR he LES ESE 314 Gasoline Clean Air ce eee 519 Gasoline Reformulated 519 en INDEX 671 Gauges Coolant Temperatufe os veh ode ep 298 n ca at ok P PT 297 DDCGHOmMOIBE sr dura ka im RCRECURUR 9m d EC 296 BE Tu ator i is EP PE he DNE 289 Gear Ranges uus does PSOE Bate x ORE R ded dis 431 439 Gear Select Lever Override acca cawegaw eR es 575 General Information 20 29 144 226 518 Bip nn oa eos dd eee Arm 619 Gross Axle Weight Rating 931 534 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 931 534 OVR rr 53l Hands Free Phone Uconnect 114 Hazard Warning Flasher xa u sacr dede ay aa 558 OOE g erroaren 627 Bulb Keplacement i252 xe ER Ex X 628 Clean 299 7929999 RS IRA esos CE P 618 CD WIG VIDERES 2 5 3992 9 91 1505 8 de tetor godes 183 Replace 444 242 OREL nese ns RS S 628 Heated Mirrors llle 112 Hene auus 26 2848 ware P X US S Peas Saber eae ea 401 Heater Engine BIOOK ace kod tee gee be ews 427 Eph Beam IAdigalot san aces daw agi a eot Sure 291 Hill Descent Control sss 484 Hill Descent Control Indic
47. from the vehicle ahead The ACC Systems provides Overtake Aid when passing on the left hand side only When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target vehicle the system will turn signal 032435496 Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status Menu Button Press the MENU button located on the steer ing wheel repeatedly until one of the follow ing displays in the EVIC Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set VWMUZ The Light The Afters He Lives ACC 55 mph RS Example Only 032433431 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e Set Speed Change e Distance Setting Change e System Cancel e Driver O
48. gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de List Or Browse Mode vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described each track in the current list and then forward to the below will bring up List mode List mode enables next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the desired track when it is playing the track press the audio device d OE UU ea n pressing ae e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ a in a similar manner
49. if AWD Low is selected the Selec Terrain will auto matically switch back to AUTO Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain operating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during launches to minimize wheel slippage If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Normal Ride Height NRH if the transfer case is in high range The level will change to Off Road 1 if the transfer case is in Low range Auto Fully automatic full time four wheel drive operation can be used on and off road Balances 456 STARTING AND OPERATING M traction with seamless steering feel to provide im proved handling and acceleration over two wheel drive vehicles If equipped with air suspension the level will change to NRH Sand Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud sand or wet grass Driveline is maximized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control manage ment of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Off Road 1 Rock Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low range The vehicle is raised if equipped with Air Suspension for improved ground clearance Traction based tuning with improved steer ability for use o
50. if you need extra heal al the windshield sel he Mode control to Mix or Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 045662715 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures uus emos odie Hae dears 421 W Automatic Transmission 428 O Automatic Transmission i44 4399 22 ces 421 H Key Ignition Park Interlock HKevless Enter N GO 4 seas eee Ss rex bo oes 422 o Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System O Normal Staring 245534242 ee4e ee ee thas 423 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission 3 6L 4 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Engine If Equipped a 2aeaw4 xd ees 430 z 15D 425 El Gear Ranecs D Rm 431 oO If Engine Fails To Start 52 292959 x ees 425 O Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L MANE LNE 2 8 oy ee 92 8 4 E bend 427 i ee ee aks miel odeur ein ooo oes he ee ae e aon eas Ea 439 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 427 416 STARTING AND OPERAT NG ee ll Four Wheel Drive Operation O Quadra Trac I9 Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped O Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped O Shift Positions O OMNA PPOSCHIUE BS ous ace s the CIS Se D Quadra Drive II System If Equipped ll Selec Terrain If Equipped O Description O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages 2s sa s asta 4 54 me odd lll Ouadra Lift If Equipped O Description 449 449
51. in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights turn on the park lamps will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lamps and horn will remain on Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Emergency Key Removal 020207436 28 THINGS TO KNOW
52. or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a ve hicle unattended is dangerous for a number of rea sons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 4 4 STARTING AND OPERAT NG ee CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD Ready Alert Braking Rain Brake Support and if it has four wheel drive with the MP 3023 two speed trans fer case Hill Descent Control HDC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking ee STARTING
53. s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compart ment 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod9 USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges
54. set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how provide an additional acceleration based on your current ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if speed The acceleration is triggered by indicating a left necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
55. turning the A C off can help remove this heat e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 559 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get
56. vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie f
57. 2uoeeseoec aae ooo een ce eee wx 520 Mini Irip Computer 1e x edo erm e es az NIOS sertes eee Ennni ew ee eee eee 109 AUlOMatc DIMMINE vescakickiu ea des oes 110 Electric Powered 2 32 2222 080848 84 111 Electric Remote 0 000 eee ee 111 Extenor Pole geectaecuusagdearssa s 111 Heated 443526 Kaede ts Gs a ee ee ee 112 OOISIGG 254245 EEE E EE S 111 RearvieW su machen ee orks G4 i ek 5 oe 109 Dp n PT 113 Mode Fuel Saver leen 314 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System soro crus b RES 509 MODO arts ereere kierre oe Re 087 658 MEIBB BIBE 2242220540 e5 oo eee Eri mobs 520 en INDEX 675 Multi Displacement Engine System 471 Multi Function Control Lever 182 New Vehicle Break In Period 95 Occupant RestraiS i4 oae ee 6 eee eons 50 74 79 Occupant Restraints Sedan 21 52 d uf Odometer lt 2 646 446544646 bb eb SAU REGES 291 TO Sagas saa eee oe Go ae 4 Cee ee ES 291 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 462 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 462 OU Change Indicator a aces ou d eR RR de dep ERA 312 OU Change Indicator Reset sasssa mi eme dcs 312 OIL EBSIDS 22 9 341 RS ereraa 589 Sou M C 633 Change Interval 23e V EHLUHEROR eee eee eo 590 DIDSBER 243 69x 25 d ene bee eee eee s 589 Disposal 4 555 555550 SURSHERUR VA REPE PS 592 PUUT A Pem 592 Pitter Di
58. 3 will go solid If during the height change to Park Mode the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph 24 km h and the height change continues to Park Mode or exceeds 25 mph 40 km h and the vehicle height will return to NRH Park Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand EER Re Px KKK X COS OOK A CR RO PO OOS SO
59. 661 O Temp rature Grades 44 4 ins oa oh ee ee ts 662 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 655 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concern
60. A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 644 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary LLLILLLLLLDL M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 645 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil f
61. AND OPERATING 475 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emerg
62. ASAE ENPE TT 519 O Reformulated Gasoline 519 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 520 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 520 o MMT In Gasoline ess 521 BO Materials Added To Fuel 521 O Fuel Systemi Cautions usce a 3733 eun ye s 522 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 523 lll Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only I EgUIDDOd causis epet 33 929 EP ENTE 523 O E 85 General Information 523 D Ethanol Fuel E 85 lille 525 WU Tuel Reguirements 2 512 439 0 5 525 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 526 PDI ae 3 e POS Gee RS ISI REA 526 me Pene Rd sq o aote dco que thee ens ou 9d 526 O Replacement Parts 2 444 s 45es40 455 927 EN Ensure TD n 027 la Adding Fuel 0 027 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 527 3 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 530 W Vehicle Loading 0 Certification Label B Trailer Towing O Common Towing Definitions 533 O Trailer Hitch Classification 538 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Rangs seiss Meare cee eis eke 4 539 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 540 O lowing Requirements sux 1a de era 541 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ee EIOS TIDS o5 su sot earar sees eee ee ee 546 o Recreational Towing Quadra Trac I9 Single Speed Transfer Case
63. ATC f Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings e When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode operation a comfort temperature can be set by using the temperature up and down buttons and the auto blower operation will be set automatically e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger 000000 0 0 ik EE Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 4 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix 5 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407 6 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display
64. All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower a
65. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal A 021334198 Separating RKE Transmitter 3 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 021334199 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a r
66. Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion
67. Channel to select the next channel 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR Setup button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup you may say on of the the following commands following Save to save the memo e Change to setup Continue to continue recording e Switch to system setup Delete to delete the recording e Change to setup e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos e Main menu setup or During the playback you may press the Voice Command VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Switch to setup Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command ow button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For us
68. Cluster M13 20 Amp Instrument Cluster M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Controller Yellow M14 20 Amp Back Up Camera M18 15 Amp Stop Lamp i Blue Yellow If Equipped M19 25 Amp Automatic Shut Natural down 1 and 2 ari Heating Ventilation Red amp Air Conditioning Climate Control System 624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Blue Red Wireless Control Yellow down 3 Entry Module Transmission Con pL d Con tie a M29 10 Amp Tire Pressure Moni M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor re 1962 Diag Connec Yellow Output Diesel Lift He er Pump Export M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps Only Yellow M26 10 Amp _ Driver Door Switch M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Bank Red __ Controller M22 10 Amp Horns Low High M28 15 Amp _ Powertrain Red Right Blue Controller MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp _ Powertrain M38 25 Amp All Door Lock Red Controller Natural amp Unlock M33 Transmission Con d SP MOL CE e When installing the totally integrated power mod Control System ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is Module Infra Red properly positioned and fully latched Failure to Sensor Compass do so may allow water to get into the totally Module integrated power module and possibly result in a m troller CAUTION 15 Amp Left Rear electrical system failure Blue Pa
69. Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating infor mation To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Lights Only mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors By pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time Blind Spot Lights CHM mode is activated In this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Forward Collision Warning The Forward Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be s
70. Eventually if ics and other low power devices requiring power up to plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will and or prevent the engine from starting most power tools Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 035009523 Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter The power inverter switch is located on the switch ban
71. Exit Height while the vehicle speed is between 15 and 25 mph This shows that the request has been recognized and will lower to Entry Exit height when vehicle is below 15 mph Service Air Suspension System This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system The system will have limited operation at that point Immediate Air Suspension Service Repair Required This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system which results in a complete system shutdown The system will be non operational at that point Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height This message is displayed in advance warning to the driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower preset position unless the speed is reduced selected Ride Height Not Permitted The vehicle speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels Entry Exit Level Off Road Ride Height Level 1 Off Road Ride Height Level 2 Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait This message is displayed if the compressor tempera ture level is too high Level control is suspended until the compressor has cooled down Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open This message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and level control is suspended e Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change e Aerodynamic Ride Height This is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Aerody namic Height EVIC White Tell
72. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means t
73. If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporar ily in the ignition switch If this occurs place the shift lever in PARK rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as described If a malfunction 020207436 Emergency Key Removal occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoper into the lock cylinders with either side up able The engine can be started and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e The power window switches radio power sunroof if CAUTION Continued e Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel e jump Start the vehicle this feature The time for this feature is programmable e Charge the battery Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle CAUTION e If your vehicle battery become
74. Infor mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment 010809610 VIN Location NOTE Right Front Body VIN Location It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 14 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 Cy FOO M PARTI 15 o Removing Key Fob From Ignition 16 O Key In Ignition Reminder 18 Nu Key cusosortiesesvieO Rete ks 18 O Replacement Keys d va m sti ir ded n 19 O Customer Key Programming 20 O General Information 20 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 20 O Rearming Ihe System s vcra Res 21 ETO UE Ihe System 224 is aye ch a ee 2 o To Disarm The System es goo ire 22 EL TAROT OPE auc eaget e a hes 23 aM Uiluminated Entry iuisrsrcR bRGSORA ERAS 29 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 o To Unlock The Doors cas uoce tes 25 o To Lock The Doors s 26 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M ElUsing The amic Alari ue espere es 26 O Programm
75. Leaks 222242244 399333419 8 Ez E osx 100 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 611 612 613 Die oon he eo ere eee oa ow eee tees 608 Engel vis a ee ee ee C PEE Power Steering 670 INDEX M Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 634 Fog DISBESOPUIOP erea r areke 924 It Eoi i 629 EOS LISDIS uus cars Fee PEE S oo a eS RE 291 629 Folding Kear Seat a9 ac Som gods RES oce dos 179 Forward Collision Warning 228 308 329 Four Wheel Drive 06 449 455 POON 22444 3 porte or eee eee es 2 os 449 crai eee54 449 Four Wheel Drive Operation so xa e fone mde s 449 Fout Way Hazard Flasher a saca ir cmt ges 558 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 44s uy oo ay pone yg 573 Front Axle Differential 609 10 pane E E E ee os pee eee ee 518 JACOBS uu Ge kek at 308 3 380b Sec eae 521 Clean AI 44 44 4455 ce bbaoeneee nde ae ye 519 CONSON IE renare he V PROPER ROEHUA ERREUR eo 314 Ethanol 64445 s6sa5eae OPEP RR ES P3 520 Filler Cap Gas Cap Soeaurnw 60 ee Sp EA 527 530 Gasoline a aos EERAORPOREdeRRPNURESCRESS 518 fou sage 4 eon ae Sen eee ee ee nee ess 297 Fr AP RS 309 Materials Add d sus a quesbs ger iur di ea 521 Methanol x s bu PER ERR EP EUR teitei 520 INCQUINCMICIES A Suri a3 9otos Ogee eed A Ceo 633 Paver Mod ocean sgte doe Sar ect eee oe ene 314 Tan CapdGiy saad nasa 163 9 oes cans ea es 633 Fuel Opumnizer 2 6 6 bee b opes A EE EROS HGS 314 PHL N
76. M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 638 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended p
77. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT
78. Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle D Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob 0 Two Wheel Drive Models o Four Wheel Drive Models 558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
79. N as CX XXX 053810760 Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2 Front Air Dam Fasteners Quadra Lift If Equipped When off roading it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle STARTING AND OPERATING 463 or terrain be selected The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec Terrain switch position The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range 464 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering CAUTION Do not use 4WD LOW range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hardware dam age can result Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of
80. Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the
81. Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch switch Such entrapment may result in serious will stop the sunroof injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again
82. PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing
83. RR a bored 45 257 261 Window FOGGING 2ond endetageteauae ane aa 411 lunc iieceond coevaredees eed va eee as 42 PONCE P 42 Windshield Defroster rss 98 403 Windshield Washers iow aae urere hne d 192 gu saae tase pena teow he eee ee eee oe 598 Windshield Wiper Blades LL 596 Windshield Wipers a wot oe one Ee PHA steri 192 Wipers mtermittent a 1 359 x3 raara oe oe dH 194 Wipers Rain Sensitive 12045 exo e ee RR eee s 196 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped he antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna an
84. RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 5 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls TOW 6 Turn Signal Indicator amp The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and an EVIC message will appear if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 7 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 9 Hill Descent Control Indicator Light If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of the Hill y Decent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt in
85. SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the MEMORY switch on the driver s door trim panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the SELECT button a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivate
86. Terrain If Equipped CENE VA e Tire PSI If Equipped FM 103 5 Fuel Economy e Vehicle Inf O ACC 200 km h e Messages e UNITS SETTING e System Set up e Turn Menu Off Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering A Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel ward through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units System Setup Vehicle Speed Trip Info Turn Menu Off and sub menus DOWN Button A Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access 040909599 to main menus sub menus or to select a per sonal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 BACK Button e Service Keyless System refer to Keyless Enter N Go Press the BACK button to scroll back to a Passive Entry if equipped BACK Eeyore nonu op U NENN e Service Park Assist System e Park Assist System Blinded Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC EUN Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays e Keyfob Battery Low the following messages e Vehicle Not in Park e Key
87. The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible
88. The Parksense System o Parksense System Usage Precautions ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If EODD 45 4 x x5 249 ody e p AE E eee es D Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio O Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mi Overhead Console H Front Map Reading Lights O Sunglass Bin Door ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped oO Before You Begin Programming HomeLink O Programming A Rolling Code O Programming A Non Rolling Code O Canadian Gate Operator Programming O Using Homelink lt tsrass sa0neee es ECCI ily fa wee 90S e DUREE ERE eee qd 2 EL Troubleshooting Tips amp oua 25s eee O General Information 244 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 255 O Opening Sunroof Express 256 DB Opening Sunroof Manual 290 B Closing Sunroof Express 256 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 256 E Dineh Protect Feature 3a hm ez 256 O Venting Sunroof Express 257 O Sunshade Operation xad d o ds 257 End DUNCHNS 2i ctn ae rpa pr ears ae 257 O Sunroof Maintenance 4 lt 4 4005 08 rms 257 G Ignition Off Operation 0 257 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 ll Commandview Sunroof With Power Shade If Equipped D Opening Sunroof Express D Opening Sunroof M
89. The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and feature the message Remote Start Active Push deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start the START button Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle 2 Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021809601 Manual Door Lock Knob WARNING
90. This Warranty Not Cover This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired Foam earpieces which will wear over time through normal use are specifically not covered replace ment foam is available for a nominal charge UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULI ING FROM THE USE OF OR ANY FAILURE OR DE FECT IN THE PRODUCT NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY PU NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction What Will Unwired Do Unwired at its option will repair or replace any defective Product Unwired re serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If you have any questions or comments regarding your Un
91. Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp e button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Ne button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the es button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EVR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the wo button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If
92. Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfedf0 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION M Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 v rw po 4 O6 120e4449 8 FuELFRL Se REAR WINDOW 9WOSMPLD WASHER DOME LIGHT FAONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE LOWER AR RECRCULATW CONVERTIBLE ELECTROWIC ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCA WASHER FLIAD LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DGWW Abtei Pv Come omvE Em ANING SYSTEM D pm m DE QE C Vj e KA awo grake T Crm F TOW up W Qr OS Ji 6 A m BATTERY HEATEO MIRROR WINDEHELD
93. VEHICLE 609 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Front Rear Axle Fluid This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons failure This could result in a collision the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be tion taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Front Axle Fluid Level Check be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Continued The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fi
94. WARNING Continued The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides Do not put anything on or around the air bag output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as covers or attempt to open them manually You may determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are which may receive information from the front impact Sensors designed to open only when the air bags are The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an inflating impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently a left
95. a lowered apparent volume level If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode Recorded Discs The VES DVD player will play CD R and CD RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format or as a CD ROM containing MP3 or WMA files The player will also play DVD Video content recorded to a DVD R or DVD RW disc DVD ROM discs either pressed or re corded are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 If you record a disc using a personal computer there may be cases where the VES DVD player may not be able to play some or the entire disc even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players To help avoid playback problems use the following guide lines when recording discs e Open sessions are ignored Only sessions that are closed are playable e For multi session CDs that contain only multiple CD Audio sessions the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique e For CD Data or CD ROM discs always use the ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 Joliet or Romeo format Other formats such as UDF HFS or others are not supported e The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD R and CD RW disc e Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in t
96. activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a col
97. and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning e Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning L
98. are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e f the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE e If the Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer e Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
99. area insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips first and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position VCR 05255 The Remote Control Storage Locking The Remote Control All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature e To disable the Remote Control from making any changes press the Video Lock button add follow the radio s instructions select menu rear ves lock If the 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player follow the radio s instructions to turn Video Lock on The radio and the video screen s indicate when Video Lock is active e Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES Replacing The Batteries The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op eration To replace the batteries e Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote then slide the battery cover downward e Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown e Replace the battery compartment cover Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occ
100. been met Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button located by the selector switch for one second aes END SPORT i e e NEUTRAL N Switch NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 7 After the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button STARTING AND OPERATING 555 8 After the NEUTRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch 9 Shift the transmission into PARK 10 11 12 15 14 15 Release the brake pedal Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Release the parking brake Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally 16 The Keyless Enter N Go button if equipped may now be reinstalled if desired Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in
101. begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating
102. button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e 5ystem OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres NOTE sure of all four road tires For additional information Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi And Operating 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres E 7TF sures in Starting And Operating for additional Tie Proseire information 33 gy 33 e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI 33 IE 33 kPa or BAR PSI Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped Omi RUN When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter N Go icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position 041038426 Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Operat ing for more information Tire Pressure Display 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appea
103. close while you are programming 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e f the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the r
104. codes For more language codes please contact the dealer where the vehicle was purchased Dutch 2311 1517 1304 1819 2519 1418 Rating and Password Setup The Rating and Password settings work together to control the types of DVDs that your family watches Most DVD Video discs have a rating from 1 to 8 assigned to them where lower numbers are designated for all audi ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences When a DVD Video disc is loaded its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player a Password screen is displayed In order to watch the disc the rear passen ger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below To play all discs without requiring a password set the DVD player s rating to Level 8 Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc Not all DVD discs encode a Rating so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password The default rating is Level 8 play all discs without a password and the default password is 0000 Please input pa I E a d digit password HB k k x Gel ENTER Cance RETURN DVD Password Entry UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To set the password activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additiona
105. common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint 7 e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See CAUTION e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e f your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can re
106. e Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar p e Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate flipper glass may be ajar 3 e Oil Pressure Warning Light qum This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the i
107. ee e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light to illuminate a warning message to appear or the chime to sound V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the instru ment cluster for 5 seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possibl
108. fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To check the fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid
109. gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Continued en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 575 CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 6 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine OFF 3 Remove the rubb
110. glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap 1 NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the blade holder wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipp
111. high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal opera tion of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PAR
112. if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehic
113. in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone System ON pee Detected Detected Detected Some mene Flashing Flashing RaloMue No Y w Ys Ys NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF mes sage for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Pya OFF The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Park Sense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service The ParkSense
114. injury or death DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable steering wheel posi tion if equipped and the radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed 031109590 Driver Memory Buttons Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the power
115. lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Illuminated Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry feature The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features
116. lbs 5 N m reinstall the road wheel in the cargo area jack and tool kit foam tray and latch the rear load floor cover WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation 1000922271 1 Mount the road tire on the axle Stowed Spare 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible properly secure the spare tire with the 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts ee WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 569 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft Ibs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut t
117. low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident 036463509 Rear Wiper Washer Control A Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal opera tion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position
118. may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 3076 compared to gasoline operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 527 Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 528 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located under 2 Open the fuel f
119. mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IV The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR STARTING AND OPERATING 515 E Ffi Tire Pressure 33 33 33 33 PSI rni RUN 055838568 Should a low tire condition occur on any of the f
120. on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track
121. on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 493 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location area wy NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed c on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the Ter driver s side door a ak RONT SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry iadodo 3 tire size designed for your vehicle Tire Placard Location 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 494 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles mus
122. only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When in Four Wheel Drive Low e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory Adaptive To Activate Cruise Control 3 Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in Ready the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready 56789 mi Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off 032433097 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING NE 83 F Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system ACC on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden ACC 55 mph tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it Cc 56789 mi To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET
123. operation Removing ACC Sensor For Off Roading NOTE When off roading it may be advisable to re move the ACC sensor The sensor is located behind the front lower grille in the center of the vehicle After removing the lower fascia you may remove the lower sensor and bracket assembly To remove the sensor follow these instructions 1 Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on the connector and pulling it out Do not pull by the wiring or use any tools to remove the connector 2 Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the back of the bracket 3 Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket to the bumper ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 NOTE Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull the sensor off of the bracket Doing so may misalign the sensor Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after the sensor and bracket assembly is removed A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug NOTE When the sensor is removed Adaptive Cruise Control Normal Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning will not be available The cluster will display the warning ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sen JJ SOT To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the process above The fastener torque required to assembly the bracket back to the beam i
124. or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for ea
125. points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 19 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC White Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 21 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Amber Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber caution telltales For further information refer to Elec tronic vehicle Information Center EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 22 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Red Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell tales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off ee OFF 24 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 25 Temperature Gauge WARNING The temperature ga
126. power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC appl
127. precautions that must be considered before entering the water NOTE Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches 51 cm of water while crossing small rivers or streams To maintain optimal performance of your vehi cle s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches 51 cm and reduce speed app
128. quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 12 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQ lights or headlights are turned on 13 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if th
129. rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or backward Push the seatback switch forward or rear ward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING Continued e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your ch
130. removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Continued 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission 3 6L Engine If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUT
131. shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may Parking Brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The WARNING Continued parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle
132. side impact deploys the left during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats bag only When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag E 022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side 022640121 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 NOTE WARNING e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The area
133. stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The ventilated seat switches are used tocontrol the speed of the fans located in the seat Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collis
134. steering column tilt and telescoping position if equipped to the desired positions 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button num
135. switched to the Partial 480 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 4WD Low Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC
136. system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a p
137. tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If t
138. the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You engage Four Wheel Drive Low If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated NW 83 F BRAKE FCW Message 032433107 NOTE e The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h e When entering or driving in a curve the FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 guard rails or sign posts based on the course predic tion This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potenti
139. the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside rearview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check ma
140. the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031409585 Dimmer Control 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Light Color Control If Equipped Ambient lights are located under the instrument panel and the driver s and passenger s front seats The color of the ambient lights can be changed by pressing the button located above the shift lever Press the button to toggle through the colors and back to the off position Ambient Light Color Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlig
141. the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 50 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch bank in the center
142. tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate mE 2 Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin Release Cable this will pop up the outboard edge Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines Y that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator 4 Remove the storage bin will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 3 Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps 5 Pull the release cable ee STARTING AND OPERATING 531 in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the
143. to Compass Vari ance 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espafiol French Frangais ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch
144. to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is correct the Rating Level menu is displayed e Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons select the new rating level and then press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change Product Agreement This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses other wise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DO Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby MLP Lossless and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential unpublished works Copyright 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All right re served 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL General Information This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located
145. tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake Place the transmission in PARK 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Remove the key fob from ignition switch 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac l9 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is not allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL N position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground 550 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in a forward direction Towing this ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the N
146. tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 6 V Prev In radio modes press to select to the previous station In disc modes press to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 7 MENU Press to return to the main menu of a DVD disc to select a satellite audio channel from the Station list or select playback modes SCAN RANDOM for a CD 8 gt Play Pause Begin resume or pause disc play 9 W Stop Stops disc play 10 PROG Up Down When listening to a radio mode pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the radio When listening to compressed audio on a data disc PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory When listening to a 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See disc in a radio with a multiple disc changer PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previ ous disc 11 MUTE Press to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel 12 SLOW Press to slow playback of a DVD disc Press play gt to resume normal play 13 STATUS Press to display the current status 14 MODE Press to change the mode of the selected channel See the Mode Selection section of this manual for detai
147. turn on automatically 030409524 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to c
148. use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door air bags 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument modified to accommodate a disabled person contact panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided could cause serious injury including death Air under If You Need Assistance Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Continued e Supplemen
149. when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF
150. with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your ee STARTING AND OPERATING 501 vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the v
151. work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your L el Tq CU P 655 O Prepare For The Appointment 655 ULTODAIC ALl a acis dre e dpps aine kinia 655 o Be Reasonable With Requests 655 W if You Need Assistance 655 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 656 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 656 Ain Mexico Contact es ooa coe ace ea ta 656 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 657 A Gervice CONUGC x eoe utra ie ee ae ee nee ache 657 W Warranty Information 658 EM MOPAR Parts 44 ccheen occu ees 3r Be RU ss 658 B Reporting Safety Defects 658 O In The 50 United States And Washington prop C 0 In Canada B Publication Order Forms 654 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire El Tracom Grades 45425445 rem rd tarit ees 661 Quality Grades P hae ee ae Be 661 oO Treadwear 4 met be eae Oe PES SES HE Se EO
152. you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 506 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 507 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard To avoid
153. 04 SEA siss 592 Oil Selection eren 590 633 CLOS BEIBUO 4 445 pc 95 eu EE take eee oat 591 OVEIDOSUUS 4044640055 anis ERAN 558 en INDEX 669 Digits fee eate vete s rS ESTER yee Ss 421 Temperature Gauge 2 43 9 31392 9 a4 9o E Ree d 298 Enemie Oil VISCOSIDI us esce 9s dr dro tenes proa 591 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart seek mem ogi Enhanced Accident Response Feature 78 Entry System Illuminated 23 Ethanol ues oe gee ue Rae oe eee es aes 520 Event Data Recorder 2304 4ia22445064 64 45 82 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 49 97 523 Exhaust Syse auae eens 44 Suc Rar dS es 97 599 Exterior EIBIS Mo MEE 24 orit ota bon coe 2S eee 615 EXretor Lights 2n suo eee eta Geet ACA OR oA EORR 100 Filters Ale Clan iss cioe adr E EXP RR ded eg Rd 592 Isa 20 TP 592 E egme OU Disposal 2 32 93 RE aoe ti 592 Igni P 615 Flashers 226456440654 08 Bee eee eee RA Pu 558 Hazard Warmin pase 6 or Gobo Pea so Sos 558 TUM Sinal sao eee tees age 100 291 628 630 Flexible Fuel Vehicles rising Range sowa ose 9 99 4 9uics oe x anb de 526 FRCS OW ace cgeed acuta ad greece RUE Rs 526 Fuel Requirements 24s26222 224 RES 029 925 Maintenance een D2 Replacement PariS se y wer de canis wo ooo i DA signo A P P 526 FPipper Glass Liffoale ow ghee iene thom ee at ai 46 Hooded Engine Starting ius sucer acsi xd erg RAS 425 Fud Capacities Locas ac eae EUR e UO bea Bon ee OE 633 bhud
154. 22 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can
155. 39 Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English p Uconnect Francais Last See Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonsbogik Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed PNR Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Nurber Entry is modified Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Voice Tree Setup T rrmalian Select Audio SMS Incoming Voica Trainin Reset Device Towing Message es Pairing Emergency Select Phone Language Announcement Contmarian Be a haw plume Seed minngungn welll English Espiat tempai nir Francais Prop ivili Say 3 niu pin euge eroe cabo pi priaritige Syalora Lists Manes Crne Hare aipirermes and fellow prompts to complete pairing
156. 449 451 452 454 455 455 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages o5 bars 64446804 Hides 460 EI CHSGERUOEI 544 75 4 as aay Be hE S X EE 460 E On Road Driving Tips 242 05 asset es 462 E Off Road Driving Tips 462 O Quadra Lift If Equipped ses e220 44 463 o When To Use 4WD Low Range If EQUIDDOG 64 4 5 45 453 024 ot oon Rr e Bede d 463 O Driving Through Waters os 2c2 e40 84 34 464 O Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 465 EC i OU ig gna dae ae oe ge pelea HS 465 E Traction Downhill os p08 arca Ome e RR S 467 E After Driving Off Road vs b ikke RS 467 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 M Power Steering ss 4cdeh4004424deeeue5s 468 BS Cle BRIDE cererii SG ee eae ee Ge So 468 DOG PCIe C 469 O Power Steering Fluid Check 470 ll Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 4 42 enki 471 W Parking Brake lt 5554654566 RIO RE RES 471 ll Electronic Brake Control System 474 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 474 OB Traction Control System TCS 475 G Brake Assist System BAS 475 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 476 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 477 O Trailer Sway Control TSC 480 O Hill Start Assist HSA 481 o Ready Alert Braking If Equipped 483 oO Rain Brake Support If Equipped 483 O Hill Descent Control
157. 8 Pale MWC swan ooo ae ye eee aes oe 45 560 OPINIE i2 hae oe orb ees eee dede a 503 Tread Wear Indicators 4 504 COPAC PIE 2 2 E3 4 REEERE ERE 501 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 540 en INDEX 681 Tow Hooks EMergenoy 426565249044 7eu EGG D D Tow Haul Indicator Light 434 269 9 291 NOW AWS xou hore Garg A one ae he bones arene RU 533 576 24 Hour Towing Assistance 128 Disabled Venicle a sona a ee rhea ee ees ages 576 So 6 G4 ke eSNG ees nh eens a Kees 599 ReC heduOlial 245 goo 45504 PURIS ages 548 lr ra A PP 539 TOWNE ASSINE ues de cuu dre q tee e VY eed d wes 128 Traction COUWOL sses ward rate dosi rx varies pores 475 Trailer Sway Control ISC 4 suce pm 295 was 480 Taler TOWING 44 3624 ae ne SERERE RA RR whee es 533 Coole System lips s sses sema oe rade ss 547 i Mr cm 538 Minimum Requirements i3 a uoo dodo se 4 s 54 Trailer and Tongue Weight 540 WINS xidewstua m Dx CU ea oe eee eed IPAE 544 Trailer JOWIDS Guide 36s eke or redirent et 599 TraHer WESDE qorre t E EPI RS edd EOS ees 099 Transfer Case cu sues b eee en bbe 3 XEES URS 610 Maintenance 1232 3 RAS EO Per Fried SOR es 610 ransmission Automatic ace eoo y c EROR es 430 438 611 Maintenance iux dc req asus ee Be nasii 611 gu roa re PPP 428 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry sseciie eR 26 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless EU usce vau oque es reca ador Oa Os A WORT eR RA 24 Transmitter Gar
158. 89 mi m em and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and To Turn Off road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate The system will turn off and erase the set speed in or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to memory if follow these warnings can result in a collision and e You push the ON OFF button death or serious personal injury ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOT
159. 95 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause cautions the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Warranty Information Book located on the DVD Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants 596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Env
160. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 442 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans mission into PARK i
161. ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032493104 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro g
162. AND OPERATING 423 Installing And Removing The ENGINE START STOP Button Installing The Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing The Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START ST
163. ANEL 305 Put In Park To Operate Power Liftgate Automatic High Beams On Automatic High Beams Off Service Four Wheel Drive System ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Terrain Settings Automatic Terrain Settings Rock Terrain Settings Sand Mud Terrain Settings Snow Terrain Settings Sport Sport Not Available In 4 Low 4 High Is Required Rock Not Available In 4 Low 4 High Is Required To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure In Owners Manual For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 Mph Or 8 Kph Put Trans In N Press 4 Low For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 Mph Or 8 Kph Put Trans In N Press 4 Low Terrain System Settings Not Available 4 Raising Vehicle Ride Height with icon Lowering Vehicle Ride Height with icon Normal Vehicle Ride Height This message is dis played for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Normal Vehicle Ride Height Off Road Ride Height Level 1 This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 1 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Off Road Ride Height Level 2 This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 2 Vehicle Lowered To Entry Exit Park Height This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Park Height Entry Exit Park Height in Progress This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the request is made to go into Entry
164. D AUTO mode The Quadra Trac II9 transfer case provides three mode positions e 4WD HI e NEUTRAL e AWD LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed You or others could be injured if you leave the the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking Because four wheel drive provides improved traction brake should always be applied w
165. DIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is not available in all states provinces and the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 Play Video Games When connecting an external source to the AUX input be Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES input jacks located on the back of the center console jacks NOTE Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle s Power Inverter Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle s Owner s Manual for more information Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 1 Video In Yellow 2 Left Audio In White 3 Right Audio In Red 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Remote Control A TEERPNTIGS O ATUS EH Select Mode 2 EL S We 1 Press the MODE b
166. Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB air bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed
167. Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured 548 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Two Wheel Drive Four Wheel Drive Models Ground Models See Instructions Flat Tow NOT ALLOWED e Transmission in PARK e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction DSILUT NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED ii den NOT ALLOWED NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic Park level for example engine will not run tie downs leveling disabled before tying them down from the must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Quadra follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set Lift f Equipped in Starting and Operating for and or loss of proper tie down tension ee STARTING AND OPERATING 549 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a
168. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information 534 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded i
169. E e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 fe CCC oe 56789 mi Rs 032435549 Distance Setting 3 O ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 2 56789 mi 032435495 Distance Setting 2 ACC 55mph DISTANCE 1 032435548 Distance Setting 1 To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the
170. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Center Console To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid storage area 49 x 035209532 a 3 VEU J amp Storage Compartment Latches 035209531 Storage Compartment 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the WARNING lower storage compartment eu 1 JA 3 Rechargeable Flashlight Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES 3 3 e The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of j035209533 the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place Lower Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Press in on the flashlight to release it To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high Doss twice for low and a third time to return to off UE R y 035409801
171. Four Wheel IN Suo Plow 2 455665 Ere pena didt partigi 547 Dine Models cs epe LUI 549 ll Recreational Towing Behind O Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II Motorhome FIC vuv aa E69 vU 548 Ousdra DnvesdTE Pour Wheel Drive D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Models nn 550 VNE 2 5uwdexues seicoesc eos ecw ee 548 O Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Madek CPP 549 eee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Continued WARNING Continued e Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission 5 The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any d
172. HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light Mi Tire Safety Information 487 E Tite Mikio s ia o a paetos od a eddie 487 O Tire Identification Number TIN 491 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 492 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 493 418 STARTING AND OPERAT NG M Bl Tires General Information 497 EL Dre PIOSSUED ca ca 3 3 99 2556s 5 heey adit 497 O Tire Inflation Pressures 498 o Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 499 O Radial Ply ites 2 454 S3 REQUE RSS RE SURE 500 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 500 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 501 oO Full Size Spare If Equipped 502 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 502 Tite Spine P M E 503 O Tread Wear Indicators 504 EVIL Tiie MCCC 504 El Replacement CS 2 ze pP PIS DR ODER 505 W Tire Chains Traction Devices 507 W Snow Tires cnc cee ERN S EROR deeds 508 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 508 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 509 EL Base SY SIC cu su doce 843 HOG eee ee 512 O Premium System If Equipped 514 O General Information LL 518 Bl Fuel Requirements 4 518 EO OIsENOING serrer esau oe Ede teen as 518
173. HINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction a
174. ION AI 24 602 2 odes IHE S eee pons Sway Control Trailer 680 INDEX M Sy idee Eno mE O cs seas iSo ee aes ee hs 991 oystem Remote Srg secerek rrari ikt 3 29 TACHOMOIGE susc uem ax REP ow hoses RH ea ee 289 Telescoping Steering Column 2160645905208 198 199 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 405 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 298 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 87 Tie Down Hooks Cargo iv ieu ee Gone been 276 Tit Steenine COMMA a e s s e aer acie Soie Sonn 198 199 Tire and Loading Information Placard 493 Tire Identification Number TIN 491 TI MIKINE uoescescicess d 9n Bul a SOEUR uc 487 Tire Safety Information sse 9 4 87 3o rebos C det 487 jo es 100 497 661 Mc rr 498 CAAS 555 0652 0454284 dose bud dc eee o 507 Chang 239219 9r RS aus ok PE PE PAS 559 General Information 497 Fe OPCeC lt gaan ete hae God ne f bes dd 499 Inflation Pressures uua zu amber dad ws 408 JACKING Goce ee eeas ee ee ace vader beaker 559 Life f Tires xxii pu 30599 3932 X93 ons 504 Load Capachy 2444 aa x ears xod ftra 493 494 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 509 Pressure Warning LIGht sae RR temis 292 Ua ando uon av uae pd vue VE ERES 661 Radial ox uon 6 8 Sar Ew dor d Rd 500 Replacement D Prey wee Be 505 NOIGHOM 42744466004 kaea She 508 DOIG 487 DIZ6S sued wen RX GREEN a be he RE EA 489 Snow Tires 0 ee 50
175. Jeep 23012 Grand Cherokee OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu J Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyright 2011 Ch
176. K position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights And Panel Lights D To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight s
177. Left Vehicle e Key Not Detected e Liftglass Open e Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out e Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out e Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out e Service TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Starting And Operating d E ae e Premium TPM System Graphic Display E e Esc System Off 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Service Blind Spot System Blind Spot Detection Unavailable Blind Spot System Off Blind Spot System Unavailable Sensor Blocked Normal Cruise Ready When Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC system is turned off and Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Adaptive Cruise Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Ready When the ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped e ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Cancelled To disable the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Sensed V
178. NI e LIST button The LIST button will display the top ru e Preset 1 Playlists level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will e Preset 3 Albums display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device e Preset 5 Audiobooks sub menu levels are available on this system e Preset 6 Podcasts e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 4 Genres 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufactur er s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BISA mode p
179. ODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 Media Center 130 RES 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL contr
180. ODSESBHOIR 9 veces walls dep dep dde teens 116 Isa Vito re e TH O Phone Call Features uucasceece duae errer 123 D Outside Power Mirrors 111 D Uconnect Phone Features 126 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped 112 D Advanced Phone Connectivity Lol 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Things You Should Know About Your B Power Lumbar If Equipped 162 Uconnect Phone 000000 133 D Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward O General Information ua s o fae x oes 144 POUUSUCIE 4 s quu eer EY Pos PRA TOR RR 163 ll Voice Command If Equipped 144 3 Manual Front Passenger Seatback D Voice Command System Operation 144 x ELLE ds EVCOMMMANCS 34 23 t dh aet dra Y A Seded s 145 iis A eat RN i B 165 ELVOICO MANNE 1243249949 x31EOP S244 149 3 Heated Seats If Equipped 165 ll blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 150 3 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 168 O Rear Cross Path 6 0 6 eee eee 156 O Head Restraints 00000 169 o Modes Of Operation ve 933 5050928 157 360 40 Split Rear Seat sess 173 fec a ee ee E 159 O Reclining Rear Seat onono noonoo 176 D Power Seats If Equipped 159 ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 176 O Passengers Power Seat cauce ce e rS 161 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 O Setting Memory Positions And L
181. OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electr
182. OP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFE ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 e Press
183. Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically from any position The shade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the move ment and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Power Shade Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close automatically from any position The shade will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction
184. Picture AAG FO a Rear VES Ne View 12 00 amp Lock LIST Map anti REVON Select Channel Screen 2 And HDD In The MEDIA CUCI Column Rear VES Soft key 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Important Notes For Single Video Screen System VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio simultaneously In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and right side equates to Channel 2 If a video source is selected on Channel 1 then Channel 2 is for audio only Selecting a video source DVD will not show the video on the screen When selecting a video source on Channel 1 the video will display on the screen and the audio could be heard on Channel 1 in the headphones Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the Video Screen is closed Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 highlight DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER
185. RAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 4 3 2 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range STARTING AND OPERATING 431 PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ie WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is highe
186. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAler
187. SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
188. Starting and Oper ating for further information 556 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met for a shift to take place and for the position indicator prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the continue to be met until the shift has been completed ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no If any of these requirements are not met prior to position indicator lights will be on or flashing pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light are lt a M ei sae cator 16 indicates that shift requirements have not been met will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flashers 558 B8 if Your Engine Overheats 558 Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 559 OJack Location 0 eee 560 O Spare Tire 5lOWBPE assess Y ERE ES 560 El Preparations For Jacking 2cex44 4 nta 561 O Jacking Inst clos e se m oam eo grag ees ds 562 O Road Tire Installation 568 Mi jump Startine 22x94 e y eR ES 569 O Preparations For Jump Start O Jump Starting Procedure lBl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped ll Shift Lever Override
189. T 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track num
190. T button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio soun
191. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and another in an accident hurting one another badly adjust the seat Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert th
192. TING YOUR VEHICLE ie Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MINI ORS oo rece cede wnt v eee ee oe a eade 109 O Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With B Inside Day Night Mirror 109 E ue 2 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 110 O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 113 o Outside Mirrors 11 O Sun Visor Extension If Equipped 113 TM EN O Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 111 E Uconnect Phone If Equipped 114 O Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If EH
193. TO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers And Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from
194. The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant Control need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you WARNING NOTE Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it
195. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automati cally There are seven fixed blower speeds Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move TI ta ti ai ul e s s a Blower Control the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counter clockwise The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be mo
196. UR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Tite A3355 mi venaicie mia 041003874 eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in o ry monitors engine and automatic transmission con the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause da
197. Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on the outside of the handles Outside Door Handle Lock Button With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The win dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position 021909602 Re Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature ee T
198. acing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING e Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward
199. activate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Ent
200. ad a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 541 CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for further information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trail
201. adio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command vr button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command amp vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should
202. adio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie How To Use Remote Start e Vehicle theft alarm not active All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK WARNING e Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter N Go vehicle e Doors closed e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or s oddone confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Liftgate Flipper Glass closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Hazard switch off e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Dattery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC
203. age Door Opener HomeLink 246 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Tread Wear Indicators llis 504 Mw Signals area ss ud Ra ki op a E ds 291 628 630 UCI Connector x24 342 4h 05 EE Edee esha PU d 356 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 114 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 25 4456954 acs 661 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 356 682 INDEX M Universal Transmill 20445456 4e044 454644 246 Untwistine Procedure Seat Belt 4464s on eae e 58 DDHOISIen CIE 444 5 dens dU eee Res oe ns 618 Wat WTVOUS 2 ssrk2 ire s wah ca cd Ar a d 113 Variance COMPASS saei sone Rode Sod ee hs 320 Vehicle Certification Label iua rd e m 531 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Melucle DOO cesso hen ede E QS ve vx ars 494 531 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 NEMICIG DOr E aceste tae aoe Cee eye oa 412 626 Viscosity Engme Oil sssi via seks hohe cho eh os 591 Voice Recognition System VR 144 Warning Flasher Hazard 2246s px as 558 Marning ROIL OVET 242484 raadas aaa bd E a 5 Warnings and Cautions 9 3 xta050s e445 4x54 04 8 Warranty Information sos x ace 9E S3 E eee hens 658 Washers Windshield 192 598 Wasi VENICE sane on eos d 9 308 Drop dapes de bie 615 Waxing and Polishing 4 i us x ardore Sorten 615 Wheel and Wheel TiM xs doce 3 puce d rst bes 617 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care suse 617 VHC DUFE DD oos cana oo og 8
204. age that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the S button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e If supported this number may be progr
205. al collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the EVIC 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle isin Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows PARK the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Forward Alert Timing Forward Alert Timing OFF Viesr OFF Far uz oan m oe a L a gt 032435759 032435760 Example Only Example Only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehi
206. all Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 500 STARTING AND OPERATING M loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on Combining radial ply tires
207. ammable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access you
208. an or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner o
209. and a icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steer ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle After five minutes the system will cool and return to normal operation Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further infor mation NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e f the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli OFF sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Air Suspension Up A The air suspension up telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Starting And Operating e A
210. and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range High Range Four Wheel Drive Models Or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in ee STARTING AND OPERATING the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation 479 ESC OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be
211. anual Mode 3 Closing Sunroof Express 3 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode D Opening Power Shade Express D Opening Power Shade Manual Mode d Closing Power Shade Express 3 Closing Power Shade Manual Mode O Pinch Protect Feature LH Pinch Protect Override o Wind Buffeting 256 229 259 260 260 260 260 260 261 261 O Sunroof Maintenance vase b Ee 9s 262 E Tonition Off Operaion s 404 244 coon ii 262 O Sunroof Fully Closed seu 262 Bl Electrical Power Outlets 262 W Power Inverter If Equipped 266 W Cupholders ss gees ed gor ede d 268 W Storage 269 E Glove Compartment 224 x e es 269 z Puudonu D PT tesa se pas 270 A Center Console eoe s ad Ia RAE YER pees a4 271 Mi Cargo Area Features 00 272 O Rechargeable Flashlight ors senses e fase 272 LH Carso Storage Bins sy ee ee ee ey ake Meee s 274 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M D Retractable Cargo Area Cover W Rear Window Features 278 If Equipped seen 2 9 O Rear Window Wiper Washer 278 BOO HECDOWINPIOOKS qd desde erste vsdute P B Rear Window Defroster 279 ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 280 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on th
212. ar center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing 022633125 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest 022633126 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head re THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 straints and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages f i f f 2 022633426 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap 022609772 x 022633032 Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback Top Tether Strap Mounting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Us
213. are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre i qe BE Rate bps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIS
214. are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EvR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 1
215. arkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when itis e On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense sounding a tone should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working CAUTION ts properly The ParkSense system might not detect an a obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia to recognize every obstacle including small ob bumper stacles Parking curbs might be
216. arring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidew
217. ary Electrical Outlet 262 Dedis siya ee ba eee ae ee eee eee Ss 159 161 virtu PP E 468 470 DULL seere uem cate ea She ese ES 255 258 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 199 siu prr v n 42 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 67 Preparation for Jacking resi ddd 0 Goede eee 9d 561 Pretensioners vci M crc pm 62 Programmable Electronic Features 922 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless zs e ee a ee ee ee ee 24 Quadra Lift uu arua dr a odes OA a a OA SHO 457 IUIUS METRRRTRETTTITTITIILTTOTTR TIS RE 449 Radial Piy Ties sacle Gas Rx A eae Re i 500 Radio Operation aui sax pex op teas iint 400 Rain Sensitive Wiper System Ls 196 Rear Axle Differential ls 609 Rear Camera rere 49205559545 SCR EP pP 242 Rear Cross Fal ous 45 es oboe nee nee ERES 156 Rear Cupholder 3 9 29 8 des KOREA E 268 en INDEX 677 Rear Park Sense System 4 ous 340544524 26 299 Ream ocd PORA 2 992920 09 5445 I Scd d 173 Rear Window Defroster i cade dr ae 24 9 279 Rear Window Features 0 278 Rear Wiper Washer 242 5 asas eieae eaaa 278 Rearview MITTOTS 2042446605465 4064045 e es 109 Reclining Front Sedis sores vq Ee rris etats 164 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0004 82 Recreational TOWING odmere drenere RO ESPOSA 548 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 551 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 554 Reformulated Gasoline
218. as the scroll wheel on the audio ous and next tracks device or external USB device e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current wrap around mode So if the track is at the list on the top line and the first item in that list on bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward the second line terclockwise to get to the track faster T Outen Ce Se IO GOD TU eae tat e To exit List mode without selecting a track press the e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as same PRESET button again to go back to Play shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or mode Snr ee
219. at there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e With Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer
220. ate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021440013 Key Fob With Five Button RKE Transmitter ee b THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Unlock Sequence This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Flash Lamps With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal
221. ate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411 outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e Ifthe system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or c high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button Re circulation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if this mode is selected Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most case
222. ator 291 Hill Start Assist 2 0 ee 481 Hitches Trailer TOWING 626 6444 e444 Boe oor aot Rss 538 HOSP CUD os oes qr o ey a QU RU Udo Pee x 268 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 246 Hood Release 1 o eee dea Ga Res 181 Ignition Key Ignition Key Removal Illuminated Entry Immobilizer Sentry Key 672 INDEX M Infant Kesttaint 229 oe teun soe 44 ee DIEA 83 Inflation Pressure Tires ios sce sehe bee oe d 498 Information Center Vehicle LL 299 Inside Rearview Mirror esses 109 Instrument Cluster xxu seed eso hs bd 288 289 Instrument Panel and Controls 287 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 619 Integrated Power Module Fuses 620 Interior Appearance Cale oveeen eed 4 Guad ees 618 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 194 HOOO HON Givi Bee e wise F9 ea 93 Roe ee 4 oss 4 Inverter Power 4 24 ed 3e ERROR E X GO SR R3 266 Jack EOGOHOfE ess pider eae EE IT EE ES ER 560 Jack Operation x 945 aa kaa ides a tt deed 559 562 Jacking Instructions 000 562 JUMP SIO 2 see ts tisser ee te esas wes 569 Key R mind r san aem oaks ttr qon Ps 18 Key FIOM 464 n5 s tuetsy see anesaces 20 Key IRCDINCEIMCRL ec e tucr ecu bee E PE PORE P ACER E 19 Key Sentry immobilizer 4 445 042 5048 EPOR 18 Keyless Entet N GO esos ea seen es 38 319 422 Keyless Entry System aea sss a yu 2 ot ome xr bs 24 Keyless GO
223. ave reached the desired or passenger seats The seats can be adjusted forward or position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters cushion near the floor have latched 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline Recline Lever injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt 030933465 To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the WARNING outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the lever lean forward and release the lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Heated Seats If Equipped Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the equipped wit
224. bag system service If your seat includ bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first turned to the ON RUN position for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash l
225. be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp e button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to
226. belt on your chest so that it is abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too will withdraw any slack in the belt tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug JE belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNINCG A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced afte
227. ber and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD 4 Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward an
228. ber 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory 5 SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Custom
229. ber that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the Passive Entry feature for the handle may time out Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle s Passive Entry feature e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s f
230. bility to move as it may cause damage to WARNING the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar ip l switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Beat belt Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the port Pushing upward or downward on the switch will shoulder belt is no longer resting against your taise and lower the position of the support chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 030909539 Power Lumbar Switch Adjustment Bar Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under Adjustment the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Some models may be equipped with manual front driver Release the bar once you h
231. bit rate for WMA files is 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M between 64 and 192Kbps Variable bit rates are also supported For both formats the recommended sample rate is either 44 1kHz or 48kHz e To change the current file use the remote control s or DVD player s A button to advance to the next file or the V button to return to the start of the current or previous file e To change the current directory use the remote con trol s PROG Up and Down buttons Disc Errors If the DVD player is unable to read the disc a Disc Error message is displayed on the VES and Radio displays and the disc is automatically ejected A dirty damaged or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error message If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2 0 seconds the DVD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward 1 0 to 3 0 seconds at a time If the end of the disc is reached the DVD player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot conditions such as when the vehicle s interior tempera ture is above 120 F When this occurs the DVD player will display VES High Temp and will shut off the VES displays until a safe temperature is reached This shut down is necessary to protec
232. ble with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop erly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift NEUTRAL Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 Place the transmission into NEUTRAL 454 STARTING AND OPERATING 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED light by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Quadra Drive Il System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings The couplings include an Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD rear axle and the Quadra Trac II transfe
233. booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the discharged vehicle 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 573 CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer ev
234. button and release The EVIC will display the set speed ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC 032435493 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 e The system will not be controlling the distance be To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if accelerator pedal e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal 3 e You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs Dnver Override e A Trailer 5way Control TSC event occurs e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates 032435494 Driver Override 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off e You turn OFF the ignition oe eum dur ee e You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the Adaptive last set speed Cruise Control NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of Cancelled 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic 967
235. button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Ajar e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e f an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled by
236. by traffic and cross winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability A friction hydraulic sway control mecha nism and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and brak ing performance and could result in a collision Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 057007122 057007121 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 538 STARTING AND OPERATING M 057007120 Improper Adjustment of Wei2ght Distributing Hitch Incorrect Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refe
237. c Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SE
238. ch zone 1 ft 0 30 cm ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m ft or greater 1 m or greater ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob her shoulder when using ParkView structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens CAUTION Turning ParkView On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only LP the ares Press the menu hard key be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Select system setup soft key drive path 3 Press the camera setup soft key Continued 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Enable or disable
239. cle in front of you WMUZ The Light Forward Alert The Afters Timing SSS He Lives 3 oo 56789 mi FCW OFF 032033147 FCW Off Example A NOTE UMEN e The system will retain the last setting selected by the Example Only driver after ignition shut down NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over in the EVIC head objects ground reflections objects not in the path 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi
240. cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the 472 STARTING AND OPERATING park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To When the parking brake is applied with the ignition release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake the instrument cluster will illuminate disengage NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake imo before attempting to move the vehicle This light only
241. clude detailed service information for 588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNINCG You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance interval
242. con trols You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 50 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console 030909669 Rear Heated Seat Switches You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate
243. cted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING 3 6L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool el the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM message and a flashing icon are displayed on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering
244. d Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on when tempera tures are below 40 F 4 4 C When temperatures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system
245. d 272 I1 Ar 274 CaCO LION CP 274 Creo ME DOWNS 4 452 405 4 beds a di esk se ace 276 Cellular Phone 4 2 rms 114 400 Center High Mounted Stop Light 632 Certification Label 442 4 4 2 unt nr ue enna RR ase 531 Chains TIe eleme d esuuux exe wes dae 507 Changing A Flat THe serete m do rc a4 a sini 559 Clam Je IZ us mop d oad eee ene RC 489 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator LICH PPP 586 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 96 audor APP C 96 Child Restraint 22 2229 me 83 86 88 91 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 87 88 Child Satety LOCKS 482 e442 ged bo PIS E ERES 36 Clean Alr Gasolme acc 54 5 2h iesiti heces 519 Cleaning Wheels 545 4 oho oe eee ee eee eee hs 617 Climate Control vos a sdwae a dude posh ee eeays 401 ClOC riein eee en ea eee ewe cen kenis 332 342 Cold Weather Operation 027243044045 4e sends 425 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 400 Compac opare DG iaa sse xu MER Boe ES es 501 Sonn MEME 320 Compass Calibration uade sa 9 9 d weg Gu wa cues 321 Compass VaridlB 2 458445 eos d OR Rura m es 320 Comp ler Top Mave uus mu way Geos ter Ires 317 Connector UCD 252x992 aaa Seas Pe os e a 356 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 356 Conserving EUG Sos dosdegete dedi pos 2 309 89 8 nea ne 314 Console Overhead Ls 244 Contract Service euge RES S ER PEG Ed Ru SHES 657 CODI yE 4 424 4 Rae E kx PUER ERE ees PES 602 Adding Coo
246. d DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range STARTING AND OPERATING 439 PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 440 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher t
247. d a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire N STARTING AND OPERATING 491 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with th
248. d automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits WARNING quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt grounded three wire extension cord Remember to disconnect the engine block heater electrical cord could cause electrocution 428 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle Continued speed Before shifting into any gear make
249. d cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWH Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 12WK741 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
250. d have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 compact spare tires have the letter I or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 490 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum loa
251. d inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In th
252. d the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of
253. d tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid 612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi ti
254. damage to your vehicle or tires observe the against damage following precautions e Install on Rear Tires Only o Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is e Due to limited clearance use SAE class S low profile important that only traction devices in good con cables or traction devices only Security Chain Com dition are used Broken devices can cause serious pany SCC Super Z6 5Z 441 cables or equivalent are damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise recommended occurs that could indicate device breakage Re WARNING further use Using tires of different size and type M S Snow Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision 508 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment e Observe the traction device manufacturer s in structions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire SNOW TIRES Some areas of the count
255. de RES H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 337 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 340 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code REST ROG reete carini ngesti paara 340 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 341 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MPS Audio Play gene saw oa tu yu 346 o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 348 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 251 O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 351 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio H Eguipped 44444 exeo tq d xb A d x RUE oe 952 D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped acutos ches eae gode hai 356 eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped XO Connecting The iPod Or External USB IDSVIGB 64 5545 yh 93 994 8d OR EROR RN ee D Using This Feature H Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons LL lay Wode 2 G4cacedeue doen P PERS YES d D List Or Browse Mode O Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA ll Uconnect Multimedia Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped nie sage iui o PME BSI Ie Video SCG es aeey sce d Veg Gd O Play Video Games sestas nee EO OPERE aiii O Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 372 o Importa
256. de the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the BACK button to exit Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows NOTE For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set before performing the manual compass calibration The variance should be set 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map For further information refer
257. dent Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
258. deo pressing STATUS shows the status on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next mode When the mode is in an audio only source such as FM the Mode Selection menu appears on screen 4 When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER button to select the new mode 5 To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu press the BACK button on the remote control Replacing The Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation To replace the batteries e Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones and then slide the battery cover downward e Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown e Replace the battery compartment cover Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser you or your of this particular Unwired Technology LLC Unwired wire less headphone Product The warranty is not transfer able eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 How Long Does The Coverage Last This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product What Does This Warranty Cover Except as specified below this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials What Does
259. different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse
260. ds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID
261. e 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride i
262. e Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 CAUTION The engine block heater cord is located e 3 6L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector After Starting harness The idle speed is controlle
263. e check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message may be displayed for approximately 5 seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime will sound If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressu
264. e U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 492 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown
265. e anchorages and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The vehicle s seat belt must be used for the center position Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instruc tions refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily
266. e cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 The center head restraint has limited adjustment Lift WARNING upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down ward on the head restraint to lower it Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat ae Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for Rear Head Restraint extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room 030933142 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and NOTE positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to Do not fold the 60 rear seat down with the left fold down easily outboard or rear center seat belt buckled 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled T 3 2 Fold the rear seat com
267. e door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 021862579 021806189 Child Protection Door Lock Location Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remem
268. e driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
269. e event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 602
270. e interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT b
271. e latch Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt Ig go around your lap Latch Plate to Buckle 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your 5 Position the shoulder
272. e narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change between the different cruise modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET state Pressing of the MODE button in any state will result in changing to the new Mode in the OFF state ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react
273. e only the anchor positions directly be hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Top Tether Strap Attachment For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel For the outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel Please note the top tether anchor ages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirabl
274. e spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 505 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced af
275. e storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet 034609808 Front Power Outlet 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In addition to the front power outlet there is also a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo outlet located in the storage area of the center console area 034609793 Center Console Outlet Rear Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736476 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw back of the center console to convert DC current to AC power from the vehicle s battery even when notin current This outlet can power cellular phones electron use ie cellular phones etc
276. e to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger FirstRow N A N A AIR Second Row ALR AIR AIR Third Row N A N A N A e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR I
277. e transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing 552 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go remove the Keyless Enter N Go button and use the key fob to complete this procedure Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Operating for further information 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the brake pedal 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 7 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button located by the selector switch for four seconds until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete STARTING AND OPERATING 553 11 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 12 Turn OFF the engine 13 Firmly apply the parking brake 14 Shift the transmissio
278. e view through the rear window The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control lever under the mirror to the night position lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle 030434773 Adjusting Rearview Mirror 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dim ming feature is activated The mirror is twisted on the windshield button counterclockwise and requires no tools for mounting N Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 030434774 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another v
279. eck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607492 022607497 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at 1 Downward Movement a comfortable position 2 Rearward Movement THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 im 022607757 022607494 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha AHR In Reset Position B NOTE 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock If you have difficulties or problems resetting the into the back decorative plastic half Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
280. ect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you
281. ed including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States lt lt oak voce zo ss MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A CAWAMAA FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD 5 7L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering se
282. ed etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions are met i e engine running doors closed speed below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times Each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 e Off Road 1 OR1 Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI e Normal Ride Height NRH Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position e Park Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Park Mode If Park Mode is 462 STARTING AND OPERATING ee requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp
283. ed in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most effi cient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593 WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water
284. ed indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry e Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans two conditions ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2 This device must accept any interference that may be opener that has a stop and reverse feature as received including interference that may cause undesired required by Federal safety standards This includes operation most garage door opener models manufactured NOTE after 1982
285. ed that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 656 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 657 Customer Assistance For
286. ed with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the 072607742 rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the v a ee fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with 3 Wiper Arm windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze 4 Wiper Blade Holder When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599 clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detecte
287. edium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Perf
288. eering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator 031705825 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 32 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel NUM GANCFI 1 ON
289. ehicle Indicator The system detects a slower moving vehicle in the same lane Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Driver Override If you apply the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Brake If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should imme diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped Clean Radar Sensor In The Front Of Vehicle If the ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting conditions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error If the ACC system turns off due to a temp
290. ehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time 502 STARTING AND OPERATING ie WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follo
291. ehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side door trim panel The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your the mirror to move 030409528 Power Mirror Switc
292. el Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 668 INDEX M Electronic Brake Control System 474 Anti Lock Brake System 23 2444 db 474 Brake Assist System sce cy od ee Secun dran rios 475 Electronic Roll Mitigation sees 9240445 476 Traction Control System 2 4 xax n aw wes 475 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 476 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 202 205 Electronic Stability Control ESC 477 Electronic Vehicle Information Center ijo es 291 299 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 573 Hazard Warning Flasher uae maxuma 558 J oera Erry Pea eee eae eee 559 JOM lan 522552265 nee neeonaese rn 569 TOW Hooks PP 575 Emission Control System Maintenance 586 Engine Pi CMCC pote bee oe Chee Gs dnb eds 592 Plock CAII od dra nurori EE TURA IRE 427 Break In Recommendations 95 COMPOMMICNE osautegaeiacasensts ss 083 584 Compartment Identification 983 084 CODI uae Gas duda aed aoe eee ed 602 Exhaust Gas Caution 49 97 523 Paus 40 ODE as eeee os XR PEOR IN PIER 425 Flooded SANNE PPP 425 Fuel Requirements 4 eu vyue n Vu das 518 633 JUMP SIS Soh heen dees ped der anes 569 M lti Displacement oye a 6 sus oe Oe 471 rm 589 633 Oil Change Interval sss spats me Ede a os 590 ON Disposal erisia krya Erne hag RE ES 592 O PC 592 Oil Filter Disposal uos 12424
293. emote control s MENU button displays a list of all in Play mode Aux Video SIRIUS Backseat TV etc commands which control playback of the disc Using the pressing the remote control s SETUP button activates the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random Display Settings menu These settings control the appear play ance of the video on the screen The factory default ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 settings are already set for optimum viewing so there is no need to change these settings under normal circum stances To change the settings press the remote control s navi gation buttons A V to select an item then press the remote control s navigation buttons f lt to change the value for the currently selected item To reset all values back to the original settings select the Default Settings menu option and press the remote control s ENTER button Disc Features control the remote DVD player s if equipped settings of DVD being watched in the remote player Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed e Set the audio to the desired source and channel e Close the video screen e To change the current audio mode press the remote control s MODE button This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode Select menu e When the screen is reopened the video screen will automatical
294. en a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio volume if on will also be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio volume is also reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode
295. en position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying childr
296. en too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Ad vanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and
297. en when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap plying slight pressure to the accelerator In general the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective 574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces
298. encies for further information volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the Up button the highest flashing indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met i e engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle spe
299. ency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the 476 STARTING AND OPERATING M benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine
300. ep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Operating Tips Chart HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT WARM WEATHER f E dug COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS 0 4 6 000 568 6 pe COLD DRY CONDITIONS ae UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413 CONTROL SETTINGS Open the windows start the vehicle set the Made control to Panel or Bi Level 4 and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air Is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with A G on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort Set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost Sg Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Set the Mode contro to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather
301. er Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy En
302. er at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 542 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these e Safety chains must always be used between your guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers s
303. er liner from the cupholder located next to the shifter on the center console 576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 4 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover located on the bottom of the cupholder n ec m A _ 051210756 Shift Lever Override Access Cover 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Using the screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the shift lock lever down 7 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and install the rubber liner into the cupholder TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to the section on Quadra Lift for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and o
304. er occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine o
305. er type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 022290770 Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Liftgate Flipper Glass Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass the window switch located on the liftgate is open NOTE The liftgate flipper glass will not open if the NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should liftgate is ajar occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftga
306. erfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be periodically inspected Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision
307. eriod of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 639 referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission 5 7L only and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L
308. ermit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they ca
309. ers If Equipped 196 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 198 ll Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column If EQUIDPCG 522 923 2442460556550 Edd 199 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 200 Bl Electronic Speed Control 202 LOCH V Ale os bona Obs eee ae he ee oe 203 o To Set A Desired Speed 224s eus 203 EUG Deactivate sese sa vsque qae bni E EU 2 203 O To Resume Speed 224 s goat amp acs don EPA 204 o To Vary The Speed Setting sis wc iet deka 204 o To Accelerate For Passing 204 ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC IP EGOIPPCG cmo 40546 di Sod ores edo GA 205 D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 208 D Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 208 EN enc C rm 209 B To Set A Desired ACC Speed 210 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 D To Cancel O To Turn Off o To Resume Speed o To Vary The Speed Setting O Setting The Following Distance In ACC D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu o Display Warnings And Maintenance D Precautions While Driving With ACC O General Information D Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode o Forward Collision Warning If Equipped ll Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 211 226 228 299 O Parksense Sensors O Parksense Warning Display o Parksense Display O Enabling And Disabling Parksense O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist System D Cleaning
310. ers experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command vr button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle 030405533 l I I I i l Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approx
311. ervice Center ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 651 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or schedule 114 Months Maintenance _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before I Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the air conditioning filter 152 000 miles 247 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 652 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service
312. es 143 000 km M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 647 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing O C O O O G O C C O L L Li L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 648 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service
313. esent in the ignition If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the button on the right side of the chrome accent bar which is located on the liftgate below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle 021633019 Liftgate Passive Entry Button en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in EVIC the liftgate and Flipper glass will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel To Lock The
314. est In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Passenger s Power Seat Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in CAUTION the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its a
315. et to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change FCW status press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection scroll up or down until the pre ferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function a
316. ew Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the Quadra Drive Il Four Wheel Drive Models transfer case The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N and The transmission must be placed in PARK for the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational recreational towing towing The NEUTRAL N selection button is adjacent to Before recreational towing perform the procedure the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU selector switch in any mode position TRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 551 CAUTION Continued Shifting Into NEUTRAL N e Failure to follow these procedures can cause se WARNING vere transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered You or others could be injured if you leave the under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N damaged position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if th
317. excessive shifting and heat buildup 436 STARTING AND OPERAT NG ee Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service i
318. f Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Manageme
319. f satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Continued 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe CAUTION Continued WARNING e Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to nat
320. f the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Cruise Control Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC if equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M displayed in the menu line also Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information e If equipped with ACC one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes feature status or follow ing conditions change If ACC is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the ACC status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line e For vehicles with Cruise one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes fea
321. f you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec ond gears direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions To access all six available gears you must use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in thi
322. facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Retractors Mode earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the owners manual e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly
323. feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 f Y f Latch Anchorages Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top In addition there are top tether strap anchorages behind Tether Strap each rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ee Li LLLI Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback WARNING Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next a
324. folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Specification Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR
325. for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 658 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom
326. fter refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed 526 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you
327. g and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 661 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor trac
328. g the vehicle all of the doors including the liftgate must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed The Quadra Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear 460 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the Quadra Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Press and hold both the Up and Down buttons simultaneously between 5 and 10 seconds a message will appear in the EVIC stating leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons have been released Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Driving the vehicle over 5 mph 8 km h will return the air suspen sion to normal operation Refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in What To Do In Emerg
329. g to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator lamp will flash on off 10 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC DisplaylOdometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen yy ter 11 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Fach tire including the spare if provided Q inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle should be checked monthly when cold and placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a
330. gnition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immed
331. h 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE Outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en abled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will
332. h When HDC is enabled the HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level when necessary on grades greater than approximately 8 It will usually not activate on level ground ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC Operation In 4WD Low Range To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain system in the ROCK mode The HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and HDC will function If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph 32 km h the HDC icon will flash and HDC will not function To disable HDC press the HDC switch 4WD Low Range Set Speeds e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h e 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e 5th 6th or D Drive 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h e NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h e PARK HDC will not function HDC is intended for low speed off road driving onl
333. h Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate chime will be audible For further information refer to Customer Programmable Features System Setup Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel NOTE In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ieee WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away e There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the NOTE The power liftgate will not operate if the liftgate flipper glass is open The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches liftgate Light pressure anywhere along t
334. h heaters in both the seat cushions and recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to seatbacks the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into place WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued Fold Flat Passenger Seat 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate
335. h is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
336. h objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 030405239 Stationary Objects UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death T Opposing Traffic 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in
337. han brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons
338. hannel HDD Dd Br Weather Channel ad Mother Nature 12 00 Enter to Select Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen NOTE The VES system will retain the last setting when turned off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls DVD Video Menu m Display 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate Setting E AN i a dd 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES E EE My Files AES a ae s Controls If a channel list appears on the right side of the Sirieotrattic On Screen Disp screen touch the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear Default VES Controls screen View System Setup Play Pause dois Mi Picture heri LM A Ta Aa Map Audio Control em Vista 010107721 Rear VES Soft key 3 Touch the 1 soft key and then the DISC soft key in the MEDIA column To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the screen NOTE The 1 and 2 soft keys are displayed for the headphone channels Touch 1 or 2 based on which 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M channel you want to change select the new mode from NOTE the available list on the right Modes that are unavailable are greyed out Rear VES Controls DVD Video EDI Wes 00 27 AM HDD DISC CHP TUrZ FM Ea AUXI AUX AUX2 It D 12 00 Q Lock LIST Select Channel Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA Column e To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO ME
339. has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Headlamps With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or
340. hat your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which in
341. he AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If E
342. he VES DVD player check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs The recommended method for labeling recordable discs CD R CD RW and DVD R is with a permanent marker Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc become stuck and cause permanent damage to the DVD player Compressed Audio Files MP3 and WMA The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 and WMA Windows Media Audio files from a CD Data disc usually a CD R or CD RW e The DVD player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format so MP3 files must always end with the extension mp3 or MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension wma or WMA To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For MP3 files only version 1 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported Any file that is copy protected such as those down loaded from many online music stores will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file Other compression formats such as AAC MP3 Pro Ogg Vorbis and ATRAC3 will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin play ing the next available file If you are creating your own files the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed
343. he head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of n
344. he screen Overhead Video Screen e With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position turn the radio on by pushing the ON OFF Volume Control knob e When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted into the radio the screen turns on automatically the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Single Video Screen NOTE Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Video Entertainment System VES e The Remote Control e The Touch Screen Radio If Equipped Play A DVD 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen Or Press the LOAD button then corresponding number 1 6 where the DVD is to be loaded Non Touch Screen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 Ensure the VES Remote Control and the Headphone switch is on Channel 1 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Remote Control A TEERPNTIGS O ATUS EH Select Mode 2 EX S olk 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control AM DISC WEATHER Preset 10 2 While looking at the video screen highlight DISC by FM AUX either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by re uem peatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER SAT Ves rpm DIRECT TUNE on the Remote Control The Weather C
345. he wheel Lightly tighten the nuts pisa deir 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise AUI Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability spare tire is mounted incorrectly 060641477 C 99 060633619 Mounting Spare Tire WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray 568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 12 Remove the small center cap and securely store the special wing nut torqued to 3 7 ft
346. heat If you notice a pungent burning odor or trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 523 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine EQUIPPED running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into E 85 General Information the vehicle The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to mal conditions repaired promptly U
347. hedule Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 48 000 miles 78 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 40 000 miles 65 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 643 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N
348. hen the driver is there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping not in the vehicle speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped in Start ing and Operating for further information on the vari ous positions and their intended usages NEUTRAL This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed It provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped for further information on the various positions and their intended usages 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Shifting Procedures 4WD HI To 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmissi
349. hese strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNINCG e If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu ally vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open e If your liftgate is power closing and you put the make sure that all windows are closed and the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power climate control blower switch is set at high speed close However vehicle movement may result in a Do not use the recirculation mode detection of an obstruction Gas props support the liftgate in the op
350. hicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 522 STARTING AND OPERATING M Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con over
351. hicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 547 of continuous operation Refer to Maintenance Sched ule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOW PLOW Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision WARNING
352. hile the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 List of Preset Messages 14 Are you there yet 1 Yes 15 Where are we meeting 2 No 16 Can this wait 3 Where are you 17 Bye for now 4 I need more direction ae Wen cssc mS PEE 19 Send number to call 6 Wh y 20 Start without me 7 I love you f Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF 8 Call me Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop B Cil later the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages 10 Thanks e Press the amp button 11 See You in 15 minutes e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say 12 I am on my way Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you 13 I ll be late will then be given a choice to change it 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1
353. hould not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 543 WARNING Continued Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 2 GTW Information in Starting and Operating for proper 3 GAWR inspection procedure 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s Towing Requirements Tires GVWR and GAWR limits ra Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury
354. hs Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary a a Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 642 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Sc
355. hts if equipped 031409529 Headlight Switch To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight 5 switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position WW ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 NOTE e Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed e To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AU
356. hts are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Front Map Reading Lights second time The lights will also turn on when the The front map reading lights are mounted in the over m button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is head console P l E d s 031433151 031433150 Front MapiReading Richt Front Map Reading Light Switches Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Light Multifunction Lever The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil steering column ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area 031563030 033333449 Multifunction Lever Ambient Light ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defecti
357. iately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil chang
358. icle when the vehicle is being jacked 7 For vehicle equipped with Quadra Lift refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting And Operat ing for further information on disabling automatic leveling 562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jacking Instructions WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Carefully follow these re changing warnings to Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack help prevent personal injury or damage to your Only use the jack in the positions indicated and vehicle for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Always park on a firm level surface as far from D If working on or near a roadway be extremely the edge of the roadway as possible before raising samet a materia the vehicle To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued Jack Warning Label ee WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 563 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do n
359. ies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC lt Activation Malfunction Indicator 478 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and two wheel drive vehicles
360. ift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column AN P Power Tilt Telescoping Steering To t
361. ight in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB
362. ike situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the
363. il filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Materials Added To Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer ser vice station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discard
364. iler Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package includes a seven pin connector at the rear of the vehicle and a four pin harness located under the rear bumper The four pin harness must be unclipped before use Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O O QO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 545 057003766 6 Right Stop Turn 546 STARTING AND OPERATING 7 X 9 FxO O o Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or selecting a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature while operating the ve
365. iller door and remove the fuel filler the headlamp switch cap 056810679 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch Fuel Filler Cap ee STARTING AND OPERATING 529 CAUTION WARNING e Damage to the fuel system or emission control e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 530 STARTING AND OPERATING e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is
366. ilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the heated st
367. ilter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever Inspect exhaust system comes first Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 646 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 mil
368. imately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if i your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually ES verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 030409806 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light l
369. ing Additional Transmitters 26 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 O General Information 29 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 29 El How Io Use Remote Start ia ec seas 30 W Door Locks sata bes ER RE ss 34 O Power Door Locks e scs mae suedoP P rw ES os 35 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear IDODES du ute d betes ba eee ey ae EON 36 W Keyless Enter N Go 000 00005 38 Windows CT 42 EL Power VIBOOWS sasa seeda ice ok oe reg 42 o Wind Buffeting B Liftgate D Liftgate Flipper Glass D Power Liftgate If Equipped ll Occupant Restraints O Lap Shoulder Belts O Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 0 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped O Energy Management Feature ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 4 62 D Event Data Recorder EDR 82 O Supplemental Active Head Restraints EMC DEL REsH aus 44 Goh eae aed E SOR ica qo ps 83 Ge ae Tene RE aes aie gat oe A Engine Break In Recommendations 95 I j e ee ME RII ru ois eee gees oe 96 T EP BERNER 67 O Transporting Passengers 96 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 67 HEHU SUME ando qo Ge cee ae ORE eee es 97 J Seat Belt Extender ee
370. ing may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position or the ignition switch START STOP button is cycled to OFF the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 45633439 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control
371. inking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To WICMIOLY CPC E Memory Position Recall 429v ses tnn o To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To WICMIOR 2 ore teas aoe eae ELIT El Easy Pouy EXil S al 644 6445 6654 4 e555 Mi To Open And Close The Hood B Lights o Headlight Switch D Automatic Headlights If Equipped o Headlights On Automatically With Wipers O Smartbeam I Equipped o v4 way sses O Daytime Running Lights If Equipped H Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Hegdliss CODI oe iiec ee 56 ote oae kiti 185 E HeadBe pt Delay 2442 6a echn84 4984 os 185 O Parking Lights And Panel Lights H Fog Lights If Equipped H Interior Lights H Ambient Light Color Control IP EQUIPPEd 2 44454408456 PEOR Era e Bede 188 O Lights On Reminder less 188 ABa y OVE 3 625 2 939 9459 2p uad up raa 188 O Front Map Reading Lights 189 E Ambien ICN 2e tanec RES RDERERESE S 190 O Multifunction Lever 244 4 e rRRRRES RECS 190 maiis ieri C E D 191 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M O Lane Ronee ASis Re cy eee eee es 191 EDEISSDISTOSD ase ocu ta Hb cte que v RR kapeigi 191 o High Low Beam Switch iussu 191 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 192 o Windshield Wiper Operation 193 O Intermittent Wip r Systemi iae aee rrio 194 o Windshield Washer Operation 195 zar seres ee eee ea ee ees ee 196 O Rain Sensing Wip
372. ion Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint exe 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 in 022607494 030907533
373. ir Suspension Down The air suspension down telltale will illumi 4 nate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Starting And Op erating e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Loose Gascap Indicator If the vehicle diagnostic system determines 5 y that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator ges This light will turn on to indicate the wind we shield washer fluid is low e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV 4WD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or 4 comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar fi This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar
374. irected through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403 Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE e In Floor Mix and Defrost modes a small amount of air will flow through the outboard panel outlets for occupant comfort e The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogg
375. ironmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry
376. is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING WARNING Continued Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions system It is not a substitute for active driving ito account and may be limited upon adverse sight involvement It is always the driver s responsibil distance conditions ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather Does not predict the lane curvature or the move conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate ahead and most importantly brake operation to for such changes ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions Your complete attention is always re conditions which can result in wrong or missing quired while driving to maintain safe control of distance warnings your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s result in a collision and death or serious personal braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a injury complete stop The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 WARNING The Cruise Control s
377. ised and the front wheels on the ground Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable vehicles with a two speed transfer case may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed in structions Vehicles equipped with a single speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position and therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 6L 583 Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 584 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 585 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 585 lBl Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PPOCTAM Ss Si woo usa wad Moe eee eee dee d 586 B Replacement Parts
378. isplayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display Af
379. ission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case 3 6L Engine Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent Transfer Case 5 7L Engine MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Axle Differential Rear 5 7L MOPARS Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL5 or Engine With Tu m Limited Slip equivalent Differential ELSD Axle Differential Rear 5 7L MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 API GL5 or Engine Without Electronic Limited equivalent Slip Differential ELSD Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids or equivalent 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs 3 6L Engine EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans 5 7L Engine mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 638 H Required Maintenance Intervals 639
380. it may not work when you need it vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a e The second row seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR To install child restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH
381. itch into manual mode 14 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for both zones from the driver temperature control 15 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings 16 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature control buttons Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual ee
382. justment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitori
383. k below the Climate Controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet 035005840 Off NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indica tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers To avoid serious injury or death located in the center console Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 035133386 Front Cupholder Location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE located in the fold down center armrest Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035209521 Glove Compartment 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To open the glove compartment pull outward on the Door Storage latch and lower the glove box door Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy Ee access 035209525 Door Panel Storage ee UND
384. l instructions Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but tons select the Rating tab Highlight Change Password and then press the remote control s ENTER button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is correct the set password screen is displayed Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control s Right cursor button to select digits enter the new password e After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change PS No Limit 3 eve DVD Player Level Menu eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 To set the rating activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions e Using the remote control s Left and Right cursor buttons select the Rating tab e Highlight Change Rating and then press the remote control s ENTER button e Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button
385. l shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down 438 STARTING AND OPERATING M Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL an
386. lant Antifreeze 604 en INDEX 667 Coolant Capac iy 4a uhwisetaun 4 eg S TE PS 633 Coolant Level 22 2294 RESET HESS 606 Disposal of Used Coolant 605 Drain Flush and Refill 603 IUS DOEHDII scs gaa 4 Gag 2 oot Pore ale ae a GS 602 Points to Remember s 606 Presse dD 444 e pore ge PER IPRC es oe es 605 Radiator Cap iss 224 de agii tia 08 eee 605 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 603 633 Cruise Control Speed Control 205 A5 CP PITT 268 Customer Assistance ees 655 Data Recorder Event 00000 82 Daytime Running Lights x ure aser 544 44 185 Dealer Servite uouacedus dons r9 REHROE RS EA ee es 587 Defroster Rear Window 279 Defroster Windshield 98 403 410 Diagnostic System Onboard sese sitat ERES 585 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 613 OU Ene we ea ee rere r a 589 lower SIEGTE nn bens ce atir ewe eee ed 470 Disabled Vehicle Towing x x52 a bee sed oie ds 576 Disposal Ense OU ssa duas 6425 RP Pa RE SE en oa 592 Used Engine PINGS 55s drop E titigas 597 DGG M 24 Door Locks Automatic essen 36 Door Opener Carige 3 29 s es Vd Ard ae RE x 246 DIIS 1229244492224 39 52 59 ee seed 9 2225 462 Of Pavement esce zo eden eso ne Re 462 OTO8d aud xus dd b xx go Eu XR 462 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy E 85 Fu
387. le Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times NOTE e All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 CAUTION Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front power outlet is located inside th
388. lect TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers 051210681 TOW HAUL Switch 448 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because top gear is disabled and engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis
389. level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615 passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on Washing trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most
390. lision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer 482 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that hill and this could cause a collision with another i the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec Continued tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for fur
391. ll hole 610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs 30 to 70 N m on axles with cast iron housings Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611 Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mende
392. lose to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode fo
393. ls on changing modes 15 SETUP When in a video mode press the SETUP button to access the display settings see the display settings section to access the DVD setup menu select the menu button on the radio When a disc is loaded in the DVD player if equipped and the VESTM mode is selected and the disc is stopped press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup menu see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual 16 BACK When navigating in menu mode press to return to the previous screen When navigating a DVDs disc menu the operation depends on the disc s contents 17 lt lt In radio modes press to seek to the previous tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 18 ENTER Press to select the highlighted option in a menu 19 A NEXT In radio modes press to select to the next station In disc modes press to advance to the next audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Remote Control Storage The video screen s come with a built in storage compart ment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened To remove the remote use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove To return the remote back into its storage
394. ly turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard verify that the headphones are turned on the ON indicator is illuminated and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel If the headphones are turned on press the remote control s power button to turn audio on If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Disc Formats The VES DVD player is capable of playing the follow ing types of discs 12 mm or 8 mm diameter e DVD Video discs MPEG 2 video compression see notes about DVD Region Codes e DVD Audio discs 2 channel audio output only e Audio Compact Discs CDs e CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio format files e Video CDs MPEG 1 video compression DVD Region Codes The VES DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player the disc will not play and will be ejected DVD Audio Support When a DVD Audio disc is inserted in the VES DVD player the DVD Audio title on the disc is played by default most DVD Audio discs also have a Video title but the Video title is ignored All multi channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels which may result in
395. mage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON
396. may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for convenience reasons with no target vehicle detected Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed This is a part of normal ACC system functionality 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited a Lee T i n E 032363288 Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 Narrow Vehicles Som
397. mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 659 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department immedi ately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To orde
398. mfortable ride will result Press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph 61 km h When in the ORI position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2 6 in 65 mm This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is 458 STARTING AND OPERATINC M required To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to ORI Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 0 5 in 13 mm This position provides improved aerody namics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 99 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 mph 56 km h for greater than 20 sec
399. month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle 532 STARTING AND OPERATING ie springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure fo
400. mpt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the
401. n high traction off road surfaces Activate the Hill De scent Control for steep downhill control Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks deep ruts etc If equipped with air suspension the vehicle level will change to Off Road 2 If the Selec Terrain switch is in ROCK mode and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High the Selec Terrain system will return to AUTO Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button y SNOW AUTO 4WD SPORT Selec Terrain Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Park Mode Indicator Lamp 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp STARTING AND OPERATING 457 e Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately 1 3 in 33 mm This position should be the default position for all off road driving until OR2 is needed A smoother and more co
402. n any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could p
403. n into PARK and remove the key fob CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N Switch NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the 8 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL N transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 9 Start the engine 15 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable 10 Shift the transmission into REVERSE tow bar 16 Release the parking brake 554 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the four second timer then the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing e A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not
404. n or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or ee STARTING AND OPERATING 535 rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNINCG It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The fr
405. n the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth 620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and compo nent may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart EN biz 072710725 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse J01 40 Amp Green J02 30 Amp Power Liftgate Pink Module
406. nce immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607 Do not ov
407. nchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle The rear outboard seating positions have lower X anchorages capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M webbing mounted lower attachments and child seats with fixed lower attachments The rear seat lower an chors can be readily identified by the symbol located on the seatback directly above th
408. nd oper ating information Display Units Of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Liftgate Chime When this feature is selected the chime will sound when the liftgate is in operation signaling that the liftgate is in operation To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES C
409. nd shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on y
410. nd then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To disable the window controls on the rear doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again 021909603 Window Lockout Button ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopt
411. ng Refrigerant Air Conditioning System Air Conditioning Operating Tips Air Filter Air Pressure Tires Air Suspension TTE 411 ANDA chang Tot oe eee aes Fa eee 67 77 Aitbae Deployment esi im e dor e ace so des 79 ANDAR LIS 2x93 42942 925 99929 303 76 81 98 289 ee ee ee ee ee ee 80 71 74 77 72 74 77 Airbag Maintenance Airbag Side Airbag Window Side Curtain Alarm Sec rity Alarm o1 a9 2e9544ee yes 20 297 Alarmi Panic ieiorericesrrirats m EARS EE S 26 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio sn 353 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 474 Anti Lock Warning Light ua uo anms 296 Ana Theft SYSE vagos aes d Una dag HE ee os 297 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 244444444624 3 633 Appearance Care ane addere vw are p weg 9 T veg 614 Assist Hill Start 0 0 0004 481 Assistance TOWNE e ku eoo d dog erdt aedes BO oca d 128 Auto Down Power Windows 43 Automatic Dimming Mirror acea cede Rum sa 110 Automatic Door Locks 224 4444 EX mE S 36 Automatic Headlights x2 3 aurae md 183 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 405 Automatic Transmission 430 438 611 POC TMG 662s phon ot de eee nee oy 614 Fhuid and Piller Changes 222s 02090442 611 en INDEX 665 Plut Level Check 2428244529 6455 su 612 613 PIG IVC PPP 611 Peal dd VES s pars a and deerat dr e Pone 612 Autostick ues oe marea Re eS GR XE ES 436 445 Au
412. ng Telltale C STARTING AND OPERATING 511 Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the SENSIS Sony tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure cold tire pressure value always reinstall the valve stem cap This will CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have NOTE been established for the tire size equipped on your e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care 5 vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire damage may result when using replacement failure or condition equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes damage to the sensors may result the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Continued Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure 512 STARTING AND OPERATING
413. ng another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g
414. nge the top available gear To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury MM Actual Gear s 1 2 1 3 1 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 5 Allowed 45 4 6 NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fourth and fifth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture e vehicle speed is sufficiently high e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to se
415. nnot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of e Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STAR
416. nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5
417. nsmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 649 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary a a M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 650 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized S
418. nt Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint T
419. nt Notes For Single Video Screen o M 374 o Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen RadiO wea cua peta ue ewes hee Ge eee ee o Remote Control O Remote Control Storage presses Rer td 979 O Locking The Remote Control 2222 rez 9 9 O Replacing The Batteries 380 BO Headphones Operation 380 sihi rV 381 D Replacing The Batteries uc messe Ex riss 382 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M D Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Wanani eseas fob do Eoo e 382 O System Information 1442404604 sds 384 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls 398 O Radio enin 2 5259 boys eae eee a 399 CD PEE APP Tm 399 W CD DVD Disc Maintenance 400 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 400 W Climate Controls cerra ptrwtebeRERS e RT 401 3 Dual Zone Manual Heating And Air COMOD 3 xta d qoe E ed ERA REESE 401 D Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 405 Hoperamus Ts dose stan oes ERE ES 411 HOperaung Tips Chat 3e ees ghee riri 413 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 640105768 1 Air Outlet 6 Lower Switch Bank 11 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Hazard Switch 12 Fuel Door Release 3 Radio 8 Storage Bin 13 Headlight Switch 4 Glove Compartment 9 ESC Button 14 Dimmer Control 5 Climate Controls 10 Ignition Switch 288 UNDERSTANDING YO
420. ntil repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued 524 STARTING AND OPERATING x the other sections of this manual for information on CAUTION Y O i CAUTION features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 81ae46ab 81ae46a9 E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately a
421. number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconn
422. o front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 579 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels ra
423. ocated in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Entering From The Side Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either E Y side of the vehicle i Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three Side Monitoring different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Rear Monitoring Overtaking Approaching 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mm Overtaking Passing The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on suc
424. ol knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE
425. olant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant Adding Coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance 37 C are anticipated intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main antifreeze tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605 NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will WARNING
426. on nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com mand Sve button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile ser
427. on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery Jump Starting Procedure Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission WARNING ae Pea eit EAEE Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex cal accessories plosion 5 2 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the
428. on into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete Transfer Case Switch NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion 4WD LOW To 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete NOTE e f shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possi
429. onds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h The vehicle will enter Aero Mode regardless of vehicle speed if the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 Selec Terrain knob is turned to the SPORT posi tion Turning the Selec Terrain knob to the AUTO position will return the system to normal operation e Park Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 5 in 38 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Park Mode press the Down button once while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph 40 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Park Mode change will be cancelled To exit Park Mode press the Up button once while in Park Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec Terrain switch The height can be changed from the default Selec Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting and Operating for further information The system requires that the engine be running for all changes When lowerin
430. onic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
431. ons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans mission into
432. ontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 536 STARTING AND OPERATING M Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused
433. orary malfunction that limits functionality Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Cruise Off When Park Brake Is On ACC Cancelled Below Min Speed Coolant Low Service Air Suspension System Oil Change Due Key In Ignition 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Lights On Key In Ignition Lights On Ignition Or Accessory On Ignition Or Accessory On Lights On Turn Signal On Park Assist On Warning Object Detected Remote Start Aborted Door ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood ajar Remote Start Aborted L Gate ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel low Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn to Run Remote Start Active Push Start Button Memory 1 Profile Set Memory 2 Profile Set Memory System Unavailable Not In Park Memory System Unavailable Seatbelt Buckled Memory 1 Profile Recall Memory 2 Profile Recall Press Brake Pedal And Push Button To Start Wrong Key Damaged Key Key Not Programmed Function Currently Unavailable Power Liftgate Unlock To Operate Power Liftgate ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT P
434. ormance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the Sw button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the VR button w
435. ormula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 15 4 Quarts 14 6 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Package 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 16 Quarts 15 2 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent opark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transm
436. orque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start Remote Battery Posts The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap ger s front seat There are remote locations located under _2 Remote Negative Post the hood to assist in jump starting en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 571 WARNING 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is
437. os a SUR 53 INSPOECHON aad Rede dee RARUS E S 98 MEON eso Gee eek Pop 9 eq wes 619 PICtCNSIONEIS Wueesueg am woe ssn ae a konns 62 ReEMIMGCr DET 294 Shoulder Belt Anchorage aa sca bep eaves 59 Untwistine Procedure uus na iiri eai 58 Dede spies geeee eee ent ESTEER ey eee eas 159 Donc C heae nao oe 24 163 CIBUS 544 eave h un ee ee A POR EAE eae OA 618 Posy PONY 4 4542 oy et Ra Sees Cee ea ees 180 MMO S caue bee oa H9 RS PECORE E RE gs 176 POWE HQ 159 161 Rea DONE wise ae REESE TERTUPES 173 RECIMO 6 asa spare dor guarded Bee ee eS 164 DecUrIb OP OMS E INE S s ode perpe PESE ES 20 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 297 Selec leila wa cae eas 265 REUS NEC RUP EO ee Ss 455 Selection of Oil xs 3003 99 8 ees eee eS 590 oentty Key IMMODIZer quos e gestes te eee ax 18 Sentry Key Programming use atado adrh tS RO 20 Sentry Key Replacement cee Gucataeady na 19 Service Assistance 22s 655 Service Contact ssa tiesne 9 X PE E per y EI S 657 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction WGICQtOR 2a eee ae ead ee eR ee ees oe eee 289 Service Manuals 2433x464 Y Eee 454 44 659 Seme ING Clock d uau nce dob R E dB aa 9A 332 342 Devine s Perso 24 suae aay tahoe de eee d EA X 222 Shift Lever Override 0 0000 eu 579 N 62 os 229 Rd ETETE eto hee eee RES 428 Automatic Transmission 428 en INDEX 679 Shoulder Belts 2s4 464424444455 4545 RS 53 wire Wo C 77
438. ot remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Jack and Tool Assembly 060641337 6 564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ee CAUT O 4 For the front axle place the jack on the body flange SEHE USE just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on loca point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the tions other than those indicated in the Jacking In vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged structions for this vehicle 060637589 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 060641339 Jacking Locations Front Jacking Location 060641341 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565 5 For a rear tire place the jack in the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indi cated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060637590 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward t
439. our active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish 516 STARTING AND OPERATING once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR E 77 Tire Pressure 33 n 33 33 PSI Omi RUN 055835858 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be d
440. our vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible 468 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessaty e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impa
441. ow Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User
442. ow to rapid 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Prog
443. parking lot situations ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 3 Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts wh
444. pletely forward Rear Seat Release F 030909671 Rear Seat Folded ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer WARNTE C ORE ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down proper position position should not be used as a play area by WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever BE 030909670 Rear Seat Release WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious
445. pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button If the START STOP button is not present insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn To Run will display in the EVIC until you insert the key Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 e For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go
446. quipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change
447. r Check Engine 289 Map Reading uacua aie 9 R93 x OR eee 189 RODE exo RENE IRR ERI NE ES 189 244 Rear SEM uu 6 4 54 4 5 544 Ge Eee EENIA 630 Rear Wail weege evo eee reu 9 3s a ee ee aque 630 Seat Belt Reminder 294 security Alarm Theft Alarm 52e vr 297 BEIVIC n 627 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Mdai ug ku xu RES X Ta FEES PES 289 Side Marker 2s aom xo sober do Pb REED REPE 630 SmartBeams Tr 184 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 292 Tow Haul Indicator 291 Traction Control 674 INDEX M Tumi Sinal 54 4 444 oe Stoo es 100 182 628 630 Vanity MUEEOP ages 26d decies e cda robe aOR d 113 Loscunse VeWICIe 2253 405 01 heen tees sees 531 CS oo ae bok EEE x RUE E 493 LOCK 2222229922 2 EX AUR RU ERU d vU E ERA 34 Automatic Door een 36 Child Protection x xacoseee4uex1e3 mium xd 36 DOOL 22529543 4 5 be ob See SRM 34 Power DDOD ue vende sete woe does ees 35 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCID 22cteuweeuue P3 unr ons Fee hoe 87 88 Lubricaton DOdy aus aced edon CERE CARE Soda a 596 Maintenance Free Battery uuu 3 on eR wep a E Se 593 Maintenance Procedures nananana aaaea 588 Maintenance Schedule 638 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 289 586 Manual Service 659 Memory Feature Memory Seat KEMO Ocal 644 445 oc he oe Ge 2 eee ete es 176 Memory Seats and Radio i222 540654 tea ees 176 MeMO
448. r an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the button verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorag
449. r case The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the unit functions as a standard axle balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer STARTING AND OPERATING 455 case and axle coupling differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting information preceding this section for shifting this system SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems along with driver input to provide the best performance for all terrains Selec Terrain Switch Selec Terrain consists of the following positions e Sport Dry weather on road calibration Only avail able in 4WD High range Performance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with im proved handling and acceleration over a two wheel drive vehicle The Electronic Stability Control will set to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintain ing safe handling controls The vehicle will lower if equipped with Air Suspension to Aero Mode in High Range 4WD Low is not available in SPORT mode
450. r five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display wind
451. r loss of proper tie down tension WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577 Towing Condition Wheels OFF 2WD Models 4WD Models the Ground See instructions in Recreational Tow If transmission is operable ing under Starting and Operating Flat Tow e Transmission in NEUTRAL e Transmission in PARK e 30 mph 48 km h max speed Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e 15 miles 24 km max distance Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST ae BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position 578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in What to Do in Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach t
452. r than brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued dangerous for a number of reas
453. r the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 660 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshootin
454. r to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standards Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Dut 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 539 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Model bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt Tongue Wt See Note rmm Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of 3 700 Ibs 1 678 kg 540 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer And Tongue Weight Always lo
455. r vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle
456. r voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the hve button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 37 4 6 tt Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook en
457. r your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION
458. rammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ParkSense Display ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Park Assist System ON ParkSense Warning Display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist System OFF Slow Tone 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12
459. ramming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without relea
460. rdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your autho
461. re If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for a mini mum of five seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off 514 STARTING AND OPERATING ie for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System IPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
462. ress either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BISA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED Getting Started e Screen located in the overhead console Unfold the overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the overhead console behind t
463. rformed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from sl
464. ring When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will pro
465. riving gear 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go MN This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compart ment 050105203 ee STARTING
466. rized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally 446 STARTING AND OPERATING M Use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears and ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 and 6 Overdrive gears are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right will cha
467. rk is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or
468. rklamps Continued 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Red Stability Control System Module 626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 2 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse J13 in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type lOve BOX ais diea on v d rd Re ee 194 Grab Handle Lamp su uc Rand L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 Rear Cargo Laipe acie o cp odes x ence 9 d SCR 214 2 Vibor Vanity LAMP s 264 94 base oo paw ba V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instr
469. rmer temperatures 045633438 e Passenger Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment for the right front seat occupant Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates 045633441 cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Push the mode control buttons to choose from several patterns of air distribution Panel P Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is d
470. roblem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean
471. ront door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob pr
472. ropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 inches 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side 466 STARTING AND OPERATING M Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine a
473. rposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 496 STARTING AND OPERATING TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 180 Ibs AER 100 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs Sette aia a AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 497 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to c
474. rs Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provi
475. rvice for the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 519 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components 520 STARTING AND OPERATING M Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains grea
476. ry RKE transmitter e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs
477. ry require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smoo
478. rysler Group LLC A TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION IN FRODUCTION 33 30 978 3 273 09 0 SEER OSS eg V GRAN OR SES OCHO Oe eee da d eee Y ees THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2c eee cw weer eens UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE celere nnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 2 2 ce ew ccc wee eww ntt SIARIING AND OPERATING 44 39 60544 06S OU Un ROO RC NC OR ERR CR OR CaS HS 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 45 53 3 9 8 9958 WX 3 3 9 SOE OOS ELOCE KES RR RR CAU OS EEE ES MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 34 40888 478 959 308 7358 a 6 Wd SO ge Od ee ORC e ned MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 5434 9 s 4 05 a 69 54490 464 HOS ode deed Y qna EOE LAC SOS RR 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE i544 45399 450 COACH sae Fon OR ON INDEX ere errr eee eee ee eee es See eT eee ee ee ee oe eee ee ee er ee ee er ee ee ee ee CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 5 i Vehicle Identification Number 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION M oo oL LILLIUIILILLLLILILIIIILILIILULIILLITD UEALSGACLI LILLAL AOILOLLLU GHLLoAL LtOLLLEL D oIGLGIA AULULLIILLILLILAGMGAA o B8GoGU GAG GUMXG iuN ui L LPeLILLLLA eI A O GDBhTR G iG INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workman
479. s turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature trailer tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or ke
480. s Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichev
481. s The particles are a normal by product of the immediately after deployment process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any continues see your doctor If these particles settle on or all of the following may occur your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The ployed If you are involved in another collision the air abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Maintaining Your Air Bag System Deployed air bag
482. s 6 6 ft Ibs 9 Nm ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACG FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Offset Driving ACC
483. s and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The system The air bag may inflate accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal 2 may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components While the air for any air
484. s are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the attachments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired position retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position NOTE To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front and rear crossbars approxi mately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in 2 5 cm If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption o
485. s low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Continued Continued 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position With the Keyless Enter N Go feature opening the driv er s door when the
486. s required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left will downshift the transmission activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right will change the top available gear To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster STARTING AND OPERATING 437 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury 3 pa 2 3 4 D Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left The transmission wil
487. s section to select a lower gear range Under 444 STARTING AND OPERATING ee these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor mal operating limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat ing If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Trans mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top ove
488. ship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of you
489. shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant 7 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected 8 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings 9 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings 10 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 11 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower speed in creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control OFF 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 13 Mode Control Button Press and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to sw
490. sing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and
491. sion is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature when the trans mission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time four wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake Traction Control BTC System which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I9 system is not appropriate for conditions where AWD LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Oper ating for further information Quadra Trac Il Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4W
492. sitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance e A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the sh
493. sity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis CAUTION charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil ishes and becomes more white after approximately contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the 10 seconds as the system charges bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood Front Turn Signal 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn 1 Open the hood counterclockwise to remove from housing l 5 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the clockwise to remove from housing bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Lamps 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connec tor 2 Firmly gra
494. sp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing CAUTION e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing 5 Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged 7 Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 073310728 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly
495. speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand EVR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency
496. sposal 2s sx pd ice DE edd HRS 592 Id ntitcalon LOO a anraae dec PEE ERROR d 590 Materials Added to 004 592 Recommendation n 590 633 AEDO ESSE a 39924 SUE NP A E as 591 A1SCOBI TVA phon ah 29 3 acAcR Botero ROM Roni 591 633 Onboard Diagnostic System 085 586 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 246 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors linn 111 OVeldElVB 5 299 99 edu vp are e Sd 438 447 Overdrive OFF Switch 438 447 Overhead Console 0000 ee ee eee 244 Overheating Engine a acdogacaxd 3 83 eheu 298 558 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 659 Pant CALS ENTRE RESTOS ITI OT 614 Paint Damgo 229433 44 rk LESER E bodies 614 Panic Alarm 24446406885 noe Keg OE UR RS 26 676 INDEX M Park Sense System REAT ossa PIER AETHER RS 299 Lario Brake iq E2929 20919 499 304 I Ee d 471 Personal SeIIDOO ados sons ee 3 E er es acras 322 POS J T 95 Pets an pOr a3 2 92 0b ga Ege d 9 9 2 3054 95 Phone Cellular 1229 lt 464605666455 24445 114 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 114 Placard Tire and Loading Information 493 Polishing and Waxes s veg e dr Xie ea IP do aq 615 Power OOF LOCKS 3 usu vw Gs an eee Oe eq n d 25 IBDUBEEBE 0v Suc Ra van ee ene ee ENSE 266 LUUGA secs ocaeca Foe 2E EU ad ee dis 47 ANDON 4 scs dede ud tes CP E EIE NOR 111 Outlet Auxili
497. ss Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
498. ss the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran
499. stems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines Y that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press 586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS
500. sult in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e f a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider d t hields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges cQ C E of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on clear and open scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and uppen Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly p with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use with a clean dry towel MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel CAUTION e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the Do not use scouring pads steel wool
501. sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e Children should be warned not to touch the park or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Key Ignition Park Interlock rag This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once
502. t can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an acci
503. t not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs NOTE 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 295 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration pu
504. t or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to 16 Digit Character exit setting tone balance and fade Program Type Display MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button Countr or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information YP News News Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following GENSPUDER 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit None ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 16 Digit Character Display Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Program Type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Musi
505. t the optics of the DVD player Display Other Language Setup fatina Y Mark Y aca Wispectl Menu Language Japancac English ther bro kw Japanese English n Other XXXX Japanese lt Eng sh Other Audio Language sub title Language REY DVD Player Language Menu 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M All of the Language settings have a special Other setting to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng lish These languages are selected using a special four digit code To enter a new language code activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions e Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons highlight the Language item you want to edit and then press the remote control ENTER button e Using the remote control Down cursor button select the Other setting then press the remote control s Right cursor button to begin editing the setting e Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons select a digit for the current position After selecting the digit press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e When the entire four digit code is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the language code is not valid the numbers all change back to If the digits are visible after this step then the language code is valid Here is an abbreviated list of language
506. tal Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 54
507. tale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Oper ating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic G speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Power Steering System Over Temperature If Equipped If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER e TEMP message
508. te trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle 022209771 Liftgate Glass Release ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pulling y up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate To operate the power liftgate manually in the open direction pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put liftgate into manual mode When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps wit
509. ted Stop Lamp CHM E O 632 O Rear License Lamp 5 4d oxye aces 45 Gea os 632 IM Fluid Capacities 24555225 5064 acde eee ss 633 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 634 EVPNCMIC 4 4 adeb xS chee RE REA que eh E 634 BA DASSI ua sue 464464 oh oe oben ne ee RSS 635 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 9 8 T 074410741 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 071410760 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585 CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control sy
510. temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located e Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc J y above or below the sensors will not be detected must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in when an obstacle is detected It is recommended the EVIC that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury
511. ter driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display 518 STARTING AND OPERATING ee a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference receiv
512. ter six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions
513. ter than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 521 To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your ve
514. th quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram STARTING AND OPERATING 509 SSS Ec gt 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when 510 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no ad
515. the ENGINE START STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start to change the ignition switch to the RUN position WARNING EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to displays IGNITION MODE OFF start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C casing Serious perona minty To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of Continued an externally powered electric engine block heater avail 5 able from your authorized dealer is recommended 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed th
516. the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the langu
517. the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE this feature The time is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under a H standing Your Instrument Panel for further information LILLY I we X COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 034433149 CommandView Sunroof and Power Shade Switches ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 WARNING Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in second and the sunroof will open automatically from any the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati tended children can become entrapped by the cally This is called Express Open During Express power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
518. the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 The Dual Zone Manual Climate Controls allow both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select indi vidual comfort settings The controls consist of a series of Dual Zone Manual Heating And Air Conditioning DUICIIOUID ale and mente Anes CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the p amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The 2 ky SSS blower speed increases as you move AIC a e 1 F Qe p ooo 9 SS the control to the right from the O 32322 OFF position There are seven blower speeds 045633437 Manual Temperature Control 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Temperature Controls e Driver Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment for the left front seat occupant Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates wa
519. the rear camera feature by selecting the enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key Turning ParkView On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key and pressing the save soft key OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped 033333450 Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility L 100 1 we X a 11 o0 S 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close
520. ther information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 Ready Alert Braking If Equipped Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support If Equipped Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required 484 STARTING AND OPERATING Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain system in ROCK mode ROCK mode is only available in 4WD LOW range Hill Descent Switc
521. tion perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 662 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 664 INDEX M Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 205 Adding Fuel Additives Fuel Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter Air Conditioner Maintenance Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Controls Air Conditioni
522. to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle 8 km h increments ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal peen e You press the CANCEL button NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push
523. trol s ENTER button to select the digit Repeat these steps until all digits are entered 3 To delete the last digit navigate to the Del button and press the remote control s ENTER button 4 After all of the digits are entered navigate to the Go button and press the remote control s ENTER button Station List Menu EH Station List WEATHER Preset 10 Nick Mobile Disney Channel WEATHER DIRECT TUNE The Weather Channel Hj Tha Weather Channel 4 Mother Nature gt Cartoon 4 21 Enter to Select Channel Selection Menu For SIRIUS Backseat TV When listening to Satellite audio pressing the remote control s MENU button displays a list of all available channels Navigate this list using the remote control s navigation buttons A V to find the desired station press the remote control s ENTER button to tune to that station To jump through the list more quickly navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Disc Menu Display Settings cc Y3 Setup O EE Disc Menu me Brightness 415 WEATHER Preset 10 Contrast 15 Start Scan 13 a is Stop Random WEATHER 43 ee eat Disc Features Pa The Weather Channel B Weather Channel a Mother Nature we 2 044863159 044863160 Disc Menu For CDs Video Screen Display Settings When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc pressing When watching a video source DVD Video with the disc the r
524. try Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door 031309527 Safety Latch Location CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Hood Release 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lig
525. try you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the vr button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the S button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and net
526. ttach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint There are three top tether anchorages located on the back of the seat behind the a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 gap panel They are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessar
527. ture status or conditions change If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the Cruise status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switc
528. uge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The EVIC consists of the following EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the e ACC If Equipped instrument cluster Vehicle Spaced e Fuel Economy e Trip Info e
529. ugh force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE Ina rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to certain impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 If A Deployment Occurs e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate particle
530. ument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Lamp 0 74 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Aux Aperature Backup Lamps 7440 W21W Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps W3W Frome Park Turn Lamp os am ed eae as 7444NA Front Fog EAamips s uec ERE das ERE PSX24W Front Side Marker a uou acere ee ee ee W5W Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID s d ars u beret ee eee HE ees Dis Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp DRL 3157K Headlamps Low Beam 42k a H11 Headlamps High Beam 9005 Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Rear License Lap DS ses doe det og Rew deg aene Oe W5W Rear Turn Stop Tail Lamps ans woe sss es vas 9057 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Inten
531. under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued 560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area below the load floor 060641336 Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn the ignition OFF WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 060506162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the veh
532. unlock buttons To make your selection press and 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Auto High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Wiper Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When this feature is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Hill Start Assist HSA When this feature is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake
533. upants that may not be able to do so for themselves If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 010107716 1 Volume Control 2 Power Button 3 Channel Selection Switch 4 Power Indicator Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 NOTE The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones To conserve battery life the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1 Ensure the Remote Control channel screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch NOTE e When both switches are on Channel 1 the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 1 e When both switches are on Channel 2 the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 2 2 Press the MODE button on the remote control 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 If the video screen is displaying a video source such as a DVD Vi
534. ural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 287 Mi Instrument Cluster 288 Mi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 289 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 299 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC PISDIAVE pacar sage een Suk woe ae eae es 301 OEVIC White Telltale Lights s sssr ss asums 307 H EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 308 FLEVIC Red Telltale Lights 229a ward vera 310 O Engine Oil Change Indicator System CPGeLPCOnOW 445246 asyecaten JUR RR os OCASE CONMOL xou a4 d4 ehh dee eee x 515 O Vehicle Speed 2 22 9h 9 933 96665 Pcr e eina d 316 VED MMC a deo once Gh REGO RR de e hen aly NEn T 317 D Vehicle Info Customer Information Features PPP 318 E DNO Lug 3955350092 54 35 d 2 E335 318 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M O Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped D Compass Temperature Display D Customer Programmable Features System Setup lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If EOGUIDDEO udis 1 oe Duba tr E O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped ll Media Center 130 Sales Co
535. ushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 498 STARTING AND OPERATING eee WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a j
536. utton Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 N E 72 Fuel Economy AWG 99 9 DTE LOW FUEL MPG 10 20 Irni 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average o
537. utton on the Remote Control AM DISC WEATHER Preset 10 2 While looking at the video screen highlight VES AUX FM AUX 135 1 by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by uem repeatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER SAT Ves rpm DIRECT TUNE on the Remote Control The Weather Channel HDD Dd Br Weather Channel ad Mother Nature 12 00 Enter to Select Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 3 Touch the 1 or 2 based on the headphone channel you 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate want to change To exit press the back arrow soft key at l the top of the screen 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE Rear VES Controls LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen JEDI es 1 AM HDD DISC gg M bsc AUXI DVD Video Menu aa Display Setting See My Files DVD Setup Fue Screen Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp ey Default SAT AUX AUX2 2 MERI 12 00 Lock List System Setup AEAN View I Picture WET Select Channel Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES Audio Control View Column Rear VES Soft key 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control
538. ve outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the left side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle 031563030 Multifunction Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
539. ved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Bi Level Mode ugh Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window xf demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high unless the blower is controlled manually NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactiv
540. vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the re minder chime to sound Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates th
541. verride e System Off e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle FCW OFF 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions
542. ves to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check 3 6L Engine Regular fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613 CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine Check the
543. vice provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands
544. vity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the vR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start usi
545. w the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 WARNING Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Limited use spares are for emergency use only In spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h stallation of this limited us
546. where the SABIC is located should re e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners main free from any obstructions and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects vehicle may deploy between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects The system includes side impact sensors that are cali i j vd could be pushed into you causing serious injury brated to deploy the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant protection 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag
547. will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 SEATS are located on the outboard side of the seat There are two Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the switches that control the movement of the seat cushion vehicle and the seatback WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 030909538 Power Seat Switches Seatback Switch Power Seats If Equipped Ds Ceat Switch Some models may be equipped with eight way power driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or
548. wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper the windshield wiper blades from returning to the operation park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031563345 Windshield Wiper Operation 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031563345 Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 031563350 Windshield Washer Operation If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off
549. wired wireless headphones please phone 1 888 293 3332 or email customersupport unwiredtechnology com You may register your Unwired wireless headphones online at www unwiredtechnology com or by phone at 1 888 293 3332 System Information Shared Modes This allows the VES to output radio sources to the headphones and the radio to output VES sources to the vehicle speakers When the radio and VES channel 1 or 2 are in the same shared mode a VES icon will be visible on the radio s display for that channel and the shared icon will be visible on the VES screen When in shared mode the same audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2 If the radio functions FM AM or SAT are in the shared mode with the VES only the radio is able to control the radio functions In this case VES can share the radio mode but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to a mode that is different from the VES selected radio mode When shared the radio has priority over the VES or all radio modes FM AM The VES has the ability to switch tuner AM FM SEEK SCAN TUNE and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode When in shared disc both the radio and the VES have control of the video functions The VES has the ability to control the following video modes 1 CD Ability to Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down 2 CD Changer in radio
550. witch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031409584 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating
551. work status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connecti
552. xiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 262 Auxiliary Power Outlet 2 24099 Yuri 262 Pillar Location PPP 493 Dalle 2cueneewee dee se Se Voss 4e PvP d vus 993 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 DONS Seat Law 9h od xw yd ee ew oe Ra 53 98 Blind Spot Monitoring 3 9 5 ohne ances hawk en 150 Body Mechanism Lubrication 596 Brake Assist Systemi cesera krabi arep 03 e dedo 475 Brake Control System Electronic 474 Drake Mid P 608 Brake System 25654503420 a APR eens oa ee 607 ADU LODS benno e kd eases dd be pes 474 isis E arco cr 608 Master C vider 2454 6 ich S S SS VIRES PES 608 PAKO 44 rT eo 471 Wate LIST 9223 68 Xd s eser dar dde d 294 Brake Transmission Interlock 430 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 95 DUlD Replacement uoa voe ours oe eb 6h Esdr 626 627 Palpe LIEU s ere PE oem aca d BEER Par hd 100 Calibration COMpass S os dy ways wx SS FERA 321 Camera Rear o Luces ewe 9 Se eH Oder ord dod 242 Capacities T sue geeen WSOP Ie x aere RU x 633 Caps Filler Full uos ewm seas ERAN RES NE RE 527 Power olen auae ua ed ex tikii 470 Radiator Coolant Pressure 605 Car Washes 24 2444 phe eee heeds AER EE RES 615 Carbon Monoxide Warning 97 020 Cargo Vehicle Loading s atro RR ea 531 Cargo Area Cover 666 INDEX M Cargo Area Features v Loos tea beau ARES E AS Ss 272 Carro COMPAIIMENE 2 ea stie do ROROEdC S
553. y At vehicle speeds above 20 mph 32 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph 32 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed 486 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should turn off with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light
554. y to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts in Passenger Seating Positions section The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR ALR N A Third Row e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a child restraint tether strap For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the re
555. ystem has two control modes You should switch off the ACC system e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an et appropriate distance between vehicles e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising i e in highway construction zones at a constant preset speed For additional information When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode when driving on roads that are winding icy in this section snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can

2012 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents